giao an anh8 theo cv961 tinh

Bạn đang xem bản rút gọn của tài liệu. Xem và tải ngay bản đầy đủ của tài liệu tại đây (1.06 MB, 277 trang )

(1)<div class='page_container' data-page=1>

Preparation:13/8/10 presentation:17/8/10 class8,b
16/8/10 class8c
18/8/10 class8a
Period1REVIEW AND EXAMININATION
1The aims

a. Knowledge

- By the end of the lesson, students will be able to revise and consolidate all the old grammar
structures which they've learnt in class 6-7

.
*Grammar

- Past simple tense
* Structures: - too- either
- so- neither

- It take(s) + some one + time + to-inf.

b,
Skills

- 4 skills, but payattention to writing skills
c.attitue:

help Ss love lesson
2. Preparation.
aTeacher: Text book

Students: Books and note books

3. 3.proceduce 
a, Check the old lesson ( omit )

b, The new lesson.
Teacher's activities Students' activities

Stage *Warm-up (5')

" Chatting "
- Asks Ss soem questions.
Eg:

+ What did you do in your summer
vacation?

+ Where did you go?

+ Did you visit your relatives in the
countryside?

-Answer the questions.

Pre-Prac
tice

- Asks Ss to summarize the main contents
of English 7

?What tenses have you learnt in English
7?

I. Review and consolidation
* Past simple tense.(9')

a. Uses.

1. Diễn tả 1 hành động đã hoàn thành
tại một thời điểm xác định trong quá
khứ.

</div>
(2)<div class='page_container' data-page=2>

- Asks Ss to remember the uses and the
forms

trong quá khứ.

3. Diễn tả thói quen trong quá khứ.

4. Din tả 1 loạt hành động đã xảy ra
kế tiếp trong quá khứ.

b,
Forms,
A/ To be.

+/ S + was/ were + C
-/ S + was/ were + not + C
?/Was/ were + S + C ?

B/ Verb.

+/ S + V(ed) + ( O/A )

-/ S + did + not + V + ( O/A )
?/ Did + S + V + ( O/A ) ?
- Make the sentences
- Asks Ss to make the sentences

? Can you make the sentences?

- Lets Ss remember the rules of making
adv and against

?How do we make up the adj from adv and
against?

?Which main structures have you learnt ?
Eg1:

- Nam likes bananas and I also like
bananas.

= Nam likes bananas so do I
I like, too.
Eg2:

- Nam doesn't likes bananas and I also
don't like bananas.

= Nam doesn't likes bananas neither do I/ I
don't like, either

Eg3:

- Nam goes to school about 30 minustes
by bike.

= It takes Nam 30 minutes to go to school
by bike

* Adjectives and adverbs.(5')
Ct1. Adj + ly Adv

Eg. Slow + ly  Slowly
Quick + ly  Quickly
Ct2. Adv - ly  Adj
Eg. Badly -ly  Bad

Skillfully - ly  Skillfull.
* Structures.(16')

1. Too- either: Diễn tả sự việc sau
cũng giống nh sự việc trớc ( ở dạng
khẳng định ta dùng " too ", phủ định
ta dùng "either " ).

2. So - neither: Diễn tả sự việc sau
cũng giống nh sự việc trớc ( ở dạng
khẳng định ta dùng " So ", phủ định

ta dùng "Neither " ).

* Notes.

+/ So và neither. đứng đầu câu
+/ Too và either. đứng cuối câu
3. It take(s) + some one + time + to-inf.
( Mất bao nhiêu t/ gian để làm gì )

- Introduces the form of the book.

1. Nhằm tiếp tục nâng cao trình độ tiếng

II/ Form of English 8.(7')
- Listen to T

</div>
(3)<div class='page_container' data-page=3>

anh của các em. Tiếng Anh 8 sẽ phối hợp
rèn luyện các kĩ năng: nghe-nói-đọc-viết ở
mức độ cao hơn.

2. Mỗi đơn vị bài học gồm các mục sau:

a/ Getting started: Khai thác vốn từ vựng,
cấu trúc và kiến thức sẵn có cña häc sinh.
b/ Listen and read: Giíi thiƯu nội dung
chủ điểm, ngữ ph¸p, tõ vùng, các chức
năng giao tiếp.

c/ Speak: luyn k năng nói
d/Listen: luyện kĩ năng nghe

e/ Read: luyện kĩ năng đọc

f/ Write: luyÖn kĩ năng viết

g/ Language focus: luyện tập các bài tập
ngữ pháp, củng cố và hệ thống lại các kiến
thức trọng tâm của bài.

c.Post
Prac
tice

*cosolidation(1')

- Summarizes the main contents of the
lesson, revise and consolidate the old grammar
structures

- Listen and remember
d/ Home work (2')

- Prepare the new lesson Unit 1: Getting started + Listen and read
* Guidings:

-Read the text, find out the meaning of new words or new structures.
-What will we learn?

Preparation:13/8/10 presentation:17/8/10 class8,b
19/8/10 class8c
19/8/10 class8a

Periods 2 Unit 1: my friends
Leson 2: Getting started + Listen and read
1/ The aims.

a. Knowledge

- By the end of the lesson, studenets will be able to read the dialogue for details and
revision of simple present, simple past tense.

*. Grammar.

- Simple present tense
- Past simple tense
* Intonation:

</div>
(4)<div class='page_container' data-page=4>

- Was she your classmate ?

- She was my next door neighbor in Hue.
- She wasn't old enough to be in my class.

b,
Skills.

- 4 skills, but pay attention to reading and listening skills.
c.attitue:

help Ss love lesson
2/ Preparation.

a. Teacher: Text book, cards

b,
Students: Books and note books

3. 3.proceduce 
a/ Check the old lesson ( 3')

* Questions: Rewite the form of simple present tense and past simple tense then
make the sentences in the affermative form. ( calls on 2-3 Ss )
* Key: a/ Simple present tense

+/ S + V(s,es) + C

-/ S + do/ does + not + V + C
?/S + S + V + C ?

b/ Simple present tense
+/ S + V(ed) + C

-/ S + did + not + V + C
?/ Did + S + V + C ?
* Mark: checks, remarks and gives mark
b/ The new lesson

Teacher’sactivities Students’activities

Stages *Warm-up (3')

" Pelmanism "

- Prepares 6 cards with numbers on
one side and the verbs on the other.
Make sure the verbs are mixed up
sticks the card on the board so Ss
can only see the numbers

Eg:

Meet (1) Send (2) See (3)
Sent (1') Saw (2') Met (3')

- Work in groups ( 2 teams ) and
choose the numbers

1.2:Pr
e-read

ing - Introduces the new words

Do you know the meaning of words
?

- Writes and says the meaning of
words .( by explaining, example )

1/ New words (8')

+ seem (v). cã vỴ nh, dêng nh

+ next door neighbor (n-ph). hàng xóm
+ look like (v). trông ntn, ra sao
- Read and remember

</div>
(5)<div class='page_container' data-page=5>

- Gets Ss read the new words
- Guides Ss the intonation of
some sentences.

Eg:

+ Do I know her ?
+ Was she your classmate ?
+ She was my next door neighbor in
Hue
+ She wasn't old enough to be in
my class.

( Thể hiện thái độ quan tâm, nhiệt tình )
- Reads the first time

- Listen to T

- Practice after T (1-2 Ts)

- Work in pairs ( role play )

- Asks Ss to read the dialogue
- Gives Ss some questions, asks
them to worrk in pair to practise
?1. Is Nien Lan's friend or Hoa's

Friend?

2. How old is Nien ?
3.Wherre does Nien live ?
4. Is she a beautiful girl ?

Ex. Answer the questions(10')
S1 (asks) S2 (answers)
? 1. - She is Hoa's friend
2. - She is 12

3. - She lives in Hue
4. - Yes, she is

1,2:whi
le

reading - Asks Ss to read the dialogue
again and answer the questions in
Ex2 (11)

How do you practise the questions?
- Calls on some Ss to check.
- Listens, remarks and corrects
- Gives out some examples
Eg1:

-Nien is not old. She can't be in
Hoa's class.

= Nien is not old enough to be in
Hoa class

Eg2:

- Nien is old. She can be in Hoa's
class

= Nien is old enough to be in
Hoa's class.

- Introduces the new structures.

2/ Questions(15')

- Read the dialogue again (1-2 Ts)
- Worrk in pairs

S1 (asks) S2 (answers)
a. - Nien lives in Hue
b. - No, she doesn't

c. - The sentence is " She wasn't
old enough to be in my class."
- Correct the mistakes

- Copy
Ct1:

S + to be + not + adj + enough +

to-inf.

( khơng đủ....để làm gì.dùng cho câu
1 chủ thể ).

Ct2:

S + to be + adj + enough + to-inf
( đủ... để làm gì. dùng cho câu 1 chủ thể )
c.Post

reading *cosolidation(4')- Asks Ss to work in groups and talk 
to one another about their friends. (
using the structures above )

</div>
(6)<div class='page_container' data-page=6>

d. Home work (2') 
- Prepare the new lesson Unit 1: Speak + Listen

* Guidings:

-Read the text, find out the meaning of new words or new structures.
- What will we learn?

Preparation: 13\8\2012 presentation: : 19\8\10 class8a,

19\8\10 class8b,c

Period 3: Unit 1: my friends

Leson 3: Speak +Listen
1. The aims

a. Knowledge

- By the end of the lesson, studenets will be able to describe some one and complete
the dialogue by listening.

*. Grammar

- Simple present tense
- Past simple tense* Intonation.

Eg: - This person is short and thin , she has long hair.
- Is this Mary?

- Yes

b,
Skills.

- 4 skills, but pay attention to speaking and listening skills
c.attitue:

help Ss love lesson
2.Preparation.

a. Teacher: Text book, pictures

Students: Books and note books

3. 3.proceduce 
a. Check the old lesson (3')

</div>
(7)<div class='page_container' data-page=7>

* Key:

1. is 2. lives 3. received 4. had 5. ate
6. cooked 7. was 8. wrote 9. introduced 10. sent
* Mark: checks, remarks and gives marks

b,
The new lesson.

Teacher's activities Students' activities

Stage Warm-up (5')

- Shows the picture of
Mary and asks them to
describe her hair, her
body build ( F-12)

?How do you describe
about Mary's hair ?
Mary's body build ?

- Listens and remarks
- Gives out the form
?Can you find out the

form to describe about
one's hair or one's body
build ?

- Look at and work in
groups

Eg: She has long blond
hair

She is short and thin
- Copy

* Form.

S + have /has + adj + hair
S + to be + adj

1.1:Pre-Speak
Ing

- Prepares 6 cards so that Ss can
drill easiy.

Eg:

1. he / tall / thin.

2. she / short / slim.
3. he / short / fat.
4. long / black.
5. curly / brown.
6. straight / brown.

?How do you write the correct
sentences?

- Calls on some Ss to check
- Checks and corrects

1. word cue drill (10').
- Work in groups

* Answers.

1. He is tall and thin
2. She is short and slim
3. He is short and fat
4. She has long black hair
5. She has curly brown hair
6. She has straight brown hair

- Correct and copy
1.2:While

Speak
ing

-Guides Ss the intonation of sentences.
Eg:

- This person is short and thin ,
she has long hair.

- Is this Mary?
- Yes

- Reads the first time

- Asks Ss to look at 6 people (12)

2. Speaking (13').
- Listen

- Read following T in chorus (1-2 Ts)

</div>
(8)<div class='page_container' data-page=8>

- Calls on some Ss to describe one
people, the others have to guess
who he / she is ?

? How do you practise?

- Goes on until 6 people on the
poster are described.

- Listens and remarks

- Asks Ss to describe one of their

clasmate.

S2: Is this Mary?
S3: Yes

- Correct the mistakes

- One describe and the other have
to guess

- Asks Ss to do Ex (Listen
a,b,c,d:12-13)

- Gives Sssome expressions ( in
the box - 12 ).

- Lets Ss to guess

- Gets Ss listen to the tape ( 2 Ts )
- Asks them to compare with
their prediction.

? How do you guess ?

- Calls on some Ss to write their
answers.

- Remarks, then corrects
- Gives feed back

- Asks Ss to practise th dialogue.
- Calls on some pairs to check
- Listens and corrects their
pronunciation.

3.Complete the conversations (10')
- Work in pairs

- Guess and complete 4 dialogues
(12-13)

- Listen to the tape

- Compare or share with their
partners

Guess Answers
1. I'd like you to meet
2. Nice to meet you
3. I'd like you to meet
4. It's a pleasure to meet

you

5. Come and meet
6. How do you do
- Correct and copy

- Worrk in pairs ( role play to read)
- Correct the mistakes

C:Post
Speak
ing

*consolidation. (2')

- Summarizes the main contents.
+ Describe some one

+Complete the dialogue by listening

- Listen

- Repractise the dialogues
d.Home work (2')

- Do Ex 3,4 (6-8)
- Prepare Unit1: Read

* Guidings: - Describe the activities of people in each picture.
- Read the text

</div>
(9)<div class='page_container' data-page=9>

22\8\10 Class8c

24\8\10 Class8a

Period 5: Unit 1: my friends
Period 4: Read

1.The aims.

a. Knowledge

- By the end of the lesson, studenets will be able to know more abouy Ba's friend and
read for specific information.

*. Grammar.

- Simple present tense
- Past simple tense
* Intonation:

Eg: + I am lucky enough to have a lot of friends

+ Bao is the most sociable. He is also extremely kind and generous

b,
Skills.

- 4 skills, but pay attention to reading skill
c.attitue:

help Ss love lesson
2.Preparation.

a. Teacher: Text book

b,
Students: Books and note books

3. 3.proceduce 
3. Check the old lesson (3')

* Questions: Do Ex3 (6) ( calls on 2 Ss)
* Key:

a. Mr. Long is fat b, 
Nam is tall

He is short He is hand some

He has short hair He has a T. shirt and jeans
He is not very old He is young

* Mark: checks, remarks and gives marks

b,
The new lesson.

Teacher's activities Students' activities

Stage Warm up (3')

" Chatting "

- Asks Ss to look at 4 pictyres (10)
and talk about the activities
they want to do after school or
in their free time, then gives

them some questions.

Eg:

</div>
(10)<div class='page_container' data-page=10>

1.1:Pre

-Read
Ing

1. What are these students doing ?
2. What time of to day do you
think it is ?

3. Do you like soccer / reading
books ?

- Introduces the new words
? Do you know the meaning
of words?

- Writes and say the meaning of
words? ( by explaining,example )
- Gets Ss read the new words

1. New words (8')

+ Character (n). c¸ tÝnh, tính cách
+ Orphanage (n). trại trẻ mồ côi
+ Reserved (adj). dƠ gÇn

+ Sociable (adj). cëi më
+ Tell joke (v). nãi jock

+ Sence of humor (n). khiÕu hµi híc
- Read and remember

+ Read the following T in chorus (1-2Ts)
+ Read individually (2-3 Ss)

1.2Wh
ile
Read
ing

- Asks Ss to read the text over
- Sticks the poster of T/F
statement on the board. "
These statements are about Ba
and his friends, read them and
guess which staements are
true? which statements are false?
Eg:

a. Ba only has 3 friends Bao,
Song and Khai.

Ba and his friends have the
same characters.

c. Bao-Song-Khai are quite
reserved in public.

d. They all enjoy school and
study hard

- Checks and remarks

* T/F stagtement(10')
- Discuss in groups

- Guess then correct the false statements
St Gues

Ans
wer

Corrections

a. F -Ba has a lot of
friends but he spents
most of his time with
Bao, Song and Khai

b. F -They have

different

character

c. F -Only Song and

Khai are quite
reserved

d. T

- Correct and copy

- Gets Ss do Ex1 (14)

- Explains the meaning of the
phrases.

+doesn't affect his school
work: không ảnh hởng tới việc
học của nó

+ get tired of: nhàm chán
? Which is the best answer
A-B-C or D?

- Checks and remarks

2. Multiple choice (7')

- Work in pairs to choose the best answers.
* Answers.

a. A- Three
b,

C- doesn't affect his school work
c. B- don't tall much in public
d. D- get tired of

- Correct and copy
- Asks Ss to do Ex2 (14)

</div>
(11)<div class='page_container' data-page=11>

? How do you write the answer
for the question a? b?- f?

- Calls on some pairs to practise
- Listen and remarks

* Answers.
S1

(asks)

S2 (answers)
a. - He feels lucky having

a lot friends

b. - Bao is the most sociable
c. - Khai likes reading

d. - His jokes some time
annoy his friends

e. - Bao spends his free time
doing volunteen work at a local
orphanage

f. - ( Students' answer )
- Correct the mistakes

c.Post
Read
ing

*cosolidation(4')

- Asks Ss to work in groups
and talk to one another about
their friends ( using the adjs
they have just learnt to describe

- Worrk in groups.

d. Home work ( 2' )

- Write a paragraph ( about 50 words ) about one your close friend.
- Do Ex 4 + 7 (8-11)

- Prepare: Write

* Guidings: - Read the informations about Tam (15)
- Review the simple present and past tense.

Preparation:20/8/10 presentation:23/8/10 class8b
25/8/10 class8c
24/8/10 class8a

Period 6: Unit 1: my friends
Leson 5: Write

1 The aims

a. Knowledge

- By the end of the lesson, studenets will be able to write a paragraph about their
close friends.

</div>
(12)<div class='page_container' data-page=12>

- Simple present tense
- Past simple tense

b,
Skills.

- 4 skills, but pay attention to writing skill.
c.attitue:

help Ss love lesson

2. Preparation.

a. Teacher: Text book, pictures

b,
Students: Books and note books

3. 3.proceduce 
a. Check the old lesson ( 3')

* Question: Asks Ss to read the text
* Key: ( omit )

* Marks: Listens, remarks and gives mark

b,
The new lesson.

Teacher's activities Students' activities

Stage Warm-up (3')

" Kim's game "

- Asks Ss to look at the picture (17)
quickly, then asks them to keep
their book closed and gives out 2
questions.

Eg:

1. How many people are there in
the picture ?

2. What is each person wearing ?

- Look at the picture and work in
groups (4 groups ), then answer
the questions

1.1Pre-Writ
ing

- Asks Ss to read the information
about Tam, then answer some questions.
* Questions:

1. What is his name ?
2. How old is he ?

3. What does he look like ?
4. What is he like ?

5. Where does he live ?
6. Whom does he live with ?
7. Who is his friend ?

1. Reading (15')
- Read individually
- Answer the questions.

* Answers.

1. Le Van Tam
2. 12

3. He is tall and thin.He hair
short black hair.

4. He is sociable, humorousand
helpful.

5. He lives at 26 Tran Phu street,
Ha Noi

</div>
(13)<div class='page_container' data-page=13>

- Checkss and remarks

and an elder brother.
7. Ba and Bao

- Correct and copy

- Work individually (using the
information which they have got).
- Compare or share with their partners.
- Correct and copy

1.2While
Writ
ing

- Lets Ss write a paragraph about
Tam

- Goes around the class and helps them
- Calls on some Ss to check and
remark.

- Asks Ss to write a similar
paragraph about him/ her self
- Moves around the class and
helps Ss, then asks some to speak
infront of the class.

- Listens, remarks and corrects.

2. Sample (12')

Eg: His/Her name is...and
he/ she is...years old. He/
She livesat in...with his
grandmother, his/ her parents and
his/ her younger..., ...He/
She is...and...He/ She
has ..., he/ she rather shy
but... He/ She has a lot of
friends, his/ her close friends
are...and...

- Worrk in dividually
- Practise the exercise

- Correct and copy
c.Post

Writ
ing

*cosolidation(3')

- Summarizes the main content:
write about one self and about
other people

- Listen and remember

d. Home work ( 3' )

- Write a paragraph about one of their family member.
- Do Ex 2 + 7 (5-11)

- Prepare: Language focus 1-2

Preparation:20\8\10 presentation:26\8\10 class8a,
27\8\10 Class8b,c

Unit 1: my friends

Period 6: Language focus

1The aims

a. Knowledge

- By the end of the lesson, studenets will be able to revise of simple present tense, past
simple tense.

</div>
(14)<div class='page_container' data-page=14>

- 4 skills, but pay attention to writing and Speaking skill
*. Grammar.

- Simple present tense
- Past simple tense

b, 
Skills.

4 skills, but pay attention to writing and Speaking skill
c.attitue:

Ss love lesson
2.Preparation.

a. Teacher: Text book,cards

b,
Students: Books and note books

3. 3.proceduce 
a. Check the old lesson (5')

* Question: Write your paragraph about one close friend ( 15 - 20 words )
* Key: ( omit )

* Mark: Checks, remarks and gives mark

b,
The new lesson.

Teacher's
activities

Students' activities

Stage Warm-up (3')

" Pelmanism"
- Prepares 10
cards with
numbers on one
side and the verbs
on the other. Make
sure the verbs are
mixed up stricks
the cards on the
board so Ss can
only see the
numbers.
Eg:

meet
(1)

come

(2)

live
(3)
sent

(1')

saw
(2')

came
(3')

- Work in groups (2 teams ) and choose
the numbers.

1.1Pre-Prac
tice

- Asks Ss to use
the simple present
tense and past simple
tense to complete the

1. Gap-filling (10')

- Look at and read the paragraphs
- Work indicidually

</div>
(15)<div class='page_container' data-page=15>

paragraphs a-b
(16)

-Lets Ss to work
individually, then
compare with their
partners

- Calls on some Ss
to check

- Remarks and
corrects

1- lived 2- lives 3-sent
4-was 5- is

1-are 2-came

3-show 4-introduced
- Correct and copy

1.2While
Prac
tice

- Gives them some

cues and asks them
to use the simple
present tense or past
simple tense to write
a paragraph about
Hoa and Lan.
* Cues.

1. Lan / Hoa's best
friend

2. They /same
class /Q.Trung school
3. Last year / Hoa / to
school first time
4. Lan/ show /
around / introduc/
to new friends.

2. Writing (15')
- Discuss in pairs
* Answers.

1. Lan is Hoa's best friend

2. They are the same class at Q.Trung
school

3. Last year Hoa went to school first
time

4. Lan showed Hoa around and
introduced to new friends.

- Correct and copy

- Chooses some

answers and

corrects them in
front of the class.
- Revises the
Simple present
tense (usage and
formations)

- Asks Ss to

complete the

dialogue a mong
Ba, Tuan and his
young cousin

3. Simple present tense (10')
- Listen

- Practise in pairs and complete the
dialogue

* Answers:

Tuan: (1) - sets (2) - goes
Ba: (3) - moves (4) - is
Tuan: (5) - is (6) - is
- Correct the mistakes

</div>
(16)<div class='page_container' data-page=16>

? How do you

complete the

dialogues ?

- Calls on some
pais to check

-Remarks and

corrects

- Gets Ss practise
the dialogues
- Listens and
corrects their
pronunciation.

- Introduces the new words
? Do you know the meaning of
new words ?

- Writes and says the meaning of
new words ( by explaining, example )
- Gets Ss read the new words
- Listens and remarks

+ planet (n). Hành tinh
+ Mars (n). Sao hoả
+ Mercury (n). Soa thuỷ

+ Silly (adj). Đần độn, ngu ngốc
- Read and remember

+ Read in chorus (1-2 Ts)
+ Read individually (3-4 Ss)
- Correct the mistakes

While
prac
tice

- Repeats the structure: " (not) +
adj + enough + to-inf "

Eg:

+ Can you hang this picture over
there?

(1). No, Iam not tall enough to

hang the picture over there
=> I am not tall. I can't to hang
the picture over there.

(2). Yes, I am tall enough to hang
the picture over there

=> Yes, I am tall. I can to hang
the picture over there.

- Asks Ss to complete the exchange
a. Read/ English books/ good. (v)
b,
Drive a car/ old. (x)

- Lets the whole class repeat, then
asks some Ss to repeat

- Listens and corrects

2. Word-cue drill (15')
- Listen

- Copy

- Practise the sentences in pairs

* Answers.

a. S1.Can you read English books ?

S2. Yes, my English is good
enough to read English books.
b,

S1. Can you drive a car?

S2. No, I am not old enough to
drive a car.

- Read in chorus (1-2 Ts)
- Read individually (3-4 Ss)
- Correct and copy

</div>
(17)<div class='page_container' data-page=17>

- Asks Ss to do Ex4 (17) in pair
- Asks them to practise the dialogue
?How do you practise the dialogue?
- Listens and corrects

- Listen, then work in pairs
- Role play to practise
* Answers.

a. not big enough
b. not old enough
c. strong enough
d. good enough
- Correct and copy
c.Post

Prac

tice

*cosolidation(2')

- Summarizes the main content:
Structure. (not) + adj + enough + to-inf.

- Listen

- Practise the open sentences

d. Home work (3') 
-Write 5 sentences about themselves, using the structure: (not) + adj + enough + to-inf.

- Prepare Unit 2: Getting started + Listen and read.

Preparation:27\8\10 presentation: 30\8\10 class8c
31\8\10 Class8b
1\9\10 class8a

Periods 7: Unit 2: making arrangements.
Leson 1: Getting started + Listen and read
a.The aims.

a. Knowledge

- By the end of the lesson, studenets will be able to use the telephone to make and
confirm arrangements.

*. Grammar.

- Structure: Be going to + V(inf)
- Adverbs of place.

* Intonation:

Eg: - Can I speak to Hoa please ?
- Would you like to come ?

- I'm going to see the movie Dream City at 6.45 this evening.
- I have to ask my aunt and she's down stairs

b,
Skills.

</div>
(18)<div class='page_container' data-page=18>

help Ss love lesson

2/ Preparation.

a. Teacher: Text book, pictures, poster

b,
Students: Books and note books

3. 3.proceduce 
a/ Check the old lesson ( Omit)

b/ The new lesson

Teacher's activities Students' activities
Stage

1.1prepractice

Warm-up (5')
"Definition"

-Asks Ss to match each picture
(18) with its name and gives the
definition of these pictures on a
poster and asks them to match the
picture with itsdeffinition.

* Definition:
1. to send fax

2. to find some one's telephone number
3. to write addressand telephone number
4. to make a phone call in a street
telephone box

5. to leave and take messages
6. to make phone call any where
you like

- Match each picture with its

name and match the picture with
its definition

1.2While
Prac
tice

* Open prediction

- Sets the sence. " Hoa and Nga
are talking on the phone. They are
talking about going to see a movie."
- Asks them to guess

Eg:

1. Who made the call ?
2. Who introduced her self ?
3. Who invited the other to the movie ?
4. Who arranged the time ?

5.Who arranged the meeting place
6. Who agreed to the time ?

- Checks and remarks

1.Comprehention questions (20')
- Listen

- Read the conversation between

Nga and Hoa over ( on page 19)
* Answers.

1. Nga ...
2. Nga ...
3. Nga ...
4. Hoa ...
5. Nga ...
6. Nga ...
- Correct and copy
- Listen

- Work in pairs(one asks, one answers)
* Answers.

1. 3847329

2. Dream City at Sao Mai
Movie Theater.

3. by bike

</div>
(19)<div class='page_container' data-page=19>

- Correct and copy.
* Open questions.

- Gives them some questions and
asks Ss to answer.

Eg:

1.What is Hoa's telephone number?
2. Which movies are they going
to see? Where?

3. How is Hoa going to see the
movies?

4. Where are they going to meet?
What time?

- Listens and remarks

- Gives the phrases and their
meanings.

a. Hold on
b,

Is six thirty all right ?
c. Where's it on ?
d. A bit far from...
1. Nó đợc chiếu ở đâu ?
2. Khá xa

3. Sáu giờ 30 phút đợc chứ ?
4.(Cầm máy)Chờ nhé.

- Asks ss to practise the dialogue again
- Moves around the class and
helps them.

2. Matching the phrases with
their meaning.(14')

- Read the informations, then
match them.

* Answers.
a. -4

b
.

-3
c. -1
d
.

-2

- Role play to practise the dialogue

c.Post
Prac
tice

*cosolidation(4')

- Summarizes the main contents:
+Reading for details a coversation

+Use the telephone to make and
confirm arrangements.

- Listen

- Practise the open dialogue

d/ Home work (2')

- Write a similar dialogue in to the notes books
- Do Ex1(13)

</div>
(20)<div class='page_container' data-page=20>

Preparation:127/8/10 presentation:2/9/10 class8a,
2/9/10 class8c
31 /8/10 class8b
 Period 8: Unit 2: making arrangements.

Leson 2: Speak + Listen
1.The aims

a. Knowledge.

- By the end of the lesson, studenets will be able to talk on the telephone about
intentions with " going".

*. Grammar.

- Structure: Be going to + V(inf)
* Intonation:

Eg: - What time can we meet ?
- Can I speak to Eric, please ?
- Which band is it ?

- I'm going to a pop cocert at the City Concert Center to night.

b,
Skills.

- 4 skills, but pay attention to speaking
c.attitue:

help Ss love lesson
2.Preparation.

a. Teacher: Text book, cards

b,
Students: Books and note books

he stages of the lesson. 
a/ Check the old lesson (3')

* Question: Read the dialogue ( 13- SGK)
* Key: ( Omit )

* Mark: Listens, remarks and gives marks
b/ The new lesson

Teacher's activities Students' activities

Stage Warm-up (3')

"Chatting"

-Talks to Ss about using telephone.
Eg:

1. Do you have a telephone at home ? 2.
How often do you make a phone call ?
3. What would you say when you

</div>
(21)<div class='page_container' data-page=21>

pick up the phone to answer it ?
4. What would you say if you are
the caller ?

1.1Pre-Speak
ing

- Asks Ss to do Ex1 (20)
- Guides Ss how to do.

- Moves around the class and
helps them.

? How do you put the sentences in
the correct order ?

- Checks and remarks

- Asks some questions to check
student's understanding and focus
on the structure " Be going to"

Eg :

1. Are they talking on the phone ?
2. What are they intend to do ?
3. What time are they meeting ?
Where?

4. What form of the verbs do you
use to talk about intentions ?

- Guides Ss the intonation of some
sentences.

Eg:

+ What time can we meet ?

+ Can I speak to Eric, please ?
+ Which band is it ?

+ I'm going to a pop cocert at the
City Concert Center to night.
- Reads the first time

1. Put the correct order (15')

- Listen , then work in pairs to put
the sentences in the correct order to
make a complete conversation

* Answers.

1-b 2-f 3-j 4-a 5-i 6-c
7-e 8-k

9-g

10-h 11-d
- Correct and copy

- Listen and answer
* Answers.

a. Yes, they are

b. They intend to go to the pop
concer.

c. They are meeting inside
Center at 7.15

d. " Be going to"
* Form

S + to be + going to + V(-inf)
( Diễn tả dự định trong tơng lai gần)

- Listen and remember

- Read following T in chorus (1-2 Ts)
- Role play to practise the dialogue

1.2
While
Speak
ing

- Gets Ss practise the dialogue
- Gives the modal sentences.
+ Are you going to see a movie ?
+Yes, Iam

or + No, I am not.

- Asks Ss to practise asking and
answering by using the cue words
* Given words:

1. see a movie
2. play sports
3. meet you friends
4. help your mother
5. do your home work
? How do you practise ?

2. Word cue drill (20')
- Listen

- Work in pairs ( one asks, one answers )
Eg1. S1: Are you going to see
a movie ?

S2: Yes, Iam

Eg2. S1: Are you playing sports ?
S2: No, I am not.

</div>
(22)<div class='page_container' data-page=22>

- Listens and remark
c.Post

Speak
ing

* Feed back(2')

- Summarizes the main content:
reading and listening for details
and further practise in adverbs of place

- Correct and copy
- Listen and remember
d. Home work (2')

- Write 6 sentences about your house, using adverbs of place.
( Eg. My room is upstairs...)

- Do Ex6+7 (18-19)

- Prepare Unit2: Read

* Guidings: - Read the text,find out the meaning of new words or new structures
- What will we learn ?

Preparation:27/8/10 presentation:2/9/10 class8a
3/9/10 class8c,b

Period 9: Unit 2: making arrangements.
Lesson 3: Read

1.The aims.

a. Knowledge

- By the end of the lesson, studenets will be able to know more about Alexander Graham Bell.
*. Grammar.

- Simple past tense

* Intonation: Eg: Alexander Graham Bell was born in Edinburgh. He was a Scotsman although
he later emigrated...

b,
Skills.

- 4 skills, but pay attention to reading skill.
c.attitue:

help Ss love lesson

2.Preparation.

a. Teacher: Text book, poster, picture of Bell.

b,
Students: Books and note books

</div>
(23)<div class='page_container' data-page=23>

b, 
Check the old lesson (5')

* Question: Do Ex 2 ( 14-a,b,c). ( Calls on 1 student )
* Key: a. What are you going to eat ?

b,
What movie are you going to see ?

c. What is he going to study ?
* Mark: Checks, remarks then gives mark
 b.The new lesson

Teacher's activities Students' activities

Stage Warm-up( 2')

" Chatting"
- Asks Ss some questions.
Eg:

-Who invented telephone ?

-When was telephone invented?
- Where was the first telephone
used ?

- Answer the questions

1.1Pre-Read
ing

- Introduces the new words

? Do you know the meaning of
words?

- Writes and say the meaning of
words? ( by explaining,example )
- Gets Ss read the new words
- Listens and remarks

1. New words (8')

+ emigrate(v).xuất cảnh, di c

+ transmit(v). truyền,phát (tón hiệu)
+ conduct(v). thực hiện, tiến hành
+ demonstrate(v). biểu diễn

+ divice(n). thiết bị máy móc
+ deaf-mute(n). câm điếc

- Read and remember

+ Read in chorus following T(1-2Ts)
+ Read individually (3-4 Ss)

- Correct the mistakes
1.2While

Read
ing

- Guides Ss the intonation of some
sentences

Eg:

+ Alexander Graham Bell was
born in Edinburgh. He was a
Scotsman although he later
emigrated...

- Gets Ss practise the text.

-Hangs the poster of T/ F
statements.

* T/ F statements.

1. Alexander Graham Bell was
born in the USA.

2. He worked with deaf-mute
patients in a hospital in Boston.

2.T/F stagtement prediction (15')
-Listen and remember

-Practise following T in chorus

-Read the passage following T in
chorus

-Read individually

-Look at and guess which statements
are true/ false.

-Read the text and check their
prediction

St Gue Ans Corrections
1

</div>
(24)<div class='page_container' data-page=24>

3. Thomas Watson was Bell's

assistant.

4. Bell and Watson introduced
telephone in 1877.

5. Bell experimented with ways of
transmitting speech between
deaf-mutes over along distance.

6.Bell demonstrated his invention
at a lot of exhibitions

- Asks Ss to correct the false
statements

- Checks and remarks

3
4
5

T
F
F

deaf-mute patients

-He introduced
telephone in 1976
-He experimented
with ways of
transmitting speech
over along distance
- Correct and copy

- Asks Ss to look at the book.
- Gets Ss read the events of Bell's
life

? How do you put the sentences in
correct order ?

- Checks and remarks

3. Ordering (7')

- Look at the book (22)

- Work in pairs, then compare or share
*Alexander Graham Bell...

1-d 5-c
2- e 6-b
3- a 7- f
4- g

- Correct and copy
c.Post

Read
ing

*cosolidation(5')

- Asks Ss to write a paragraph
about Bell's life.

* Guidings:

- When and where he was born ?
- Where did he live ?

- Where did he work ?

- When did he introduce the
telephone ?...

- Write a paragraph about Bell's life by
using the information from th text.

d.Home work ( 3' )

- Write the paragraph ( which you've just written and corrected
with their friends) in to your exercise books.

-Do Ex5 (18)

- Prepare Unit 2: Write

Preparation:3/9/10 presentation:7/9/10 class8,b
6/9/10 class8c
8/9/10 class8a

Period 10 : Unit 2: making arrangements.
Lesson 4 : Write

</div>
(25)<div class='page_container' data-page=25>

a.Knowledge

- By the end of the lesson, studenets will be able to write a telephone message.
*. Grammar.

- Simple past tense
* Intonation:

Eg: Alexander Graham Bell was born in Edinburgh. He was a Scotsman although he
later emigrated...

b,
Skills.

- 4 skills, but pay attention to writing skill
c.attitue:

help Ss love lesson
2.Preparation.

a. Teacher: Text book

b,
Students: Books and note books

3. 3.proceduce 
a. Check the old lesson( 5' )

* Question: Read and translate the text.
* Key: ( Omit )

* Mark: Listens, remarks and gives marks

b, 
The new lesson

Teacher's activities Students' activities
Stage

1.1

Pre-Writ
ing

Warm-up (2')
" Jumbled words"
-Writes the words whose letters
are in random order on the
board.

Eg:

1. mcuestor
2. anddmi

3. Essgmea
4. nifarretu

- Introduces the new words
?What does the word mean?
- Writes and say the meaning of
words? ( by explaining,example )
- Talks to Ss about talking a
telephone message.

? Have you ever taken a
telephone message ?

? When do you take a telephone

- Word in groups (2 teams) go to
board and write the correct words
* Answers:

1. Customer
2. Midday
3. Message
4. furniture
1. New words (8')

+ customer (n). khách hàng
+ delivery (n).

+ stationery (n).

+pick some one up (v). đón ai
- Read and remember

- Listen
* Answers.
Eg: - Yes/ No

</div>
(26)<div class='page_container' data-page=26>

message ?

? What should be mentioned in
the message ?

to whom...
1.2Wh

ile
Writ
ing

- Asks Ss to read the message and
fill in the graps in the message( 23)
? How do you complete the
message ?

- Checkss and remarks

- Asks Ss to read passage 2 (23) to
get information and write the
message.

? How do you write the message ?
? Which information do you use ?
- Checks and remarks.

- Asks Ss to write another message
- Sets the scence. " Tom phoned
Nancy, but she was out. Lisa,
Nancy's sister toook a message for
Nancy. Help Lisa to write a
message".

- Asks Ss to read the dialogue
between Lisa and Tom, then write
the message.

- Moves around the class and help
them.

2.Reading and gap filling (23')
- Work in pairs.

* Answers.

1. phoned 5. name

2. May 12 6. delivery
3. speak 7. Mr.Hoa
4. took 8. at
- correct and copy

- Write individually, then share with
their partners.

* Answers.

+ Thanh Cong Delivery Service
+ Date: June 16

+ Time: After midday
+ For: Mrs. Van

+ Messages: Mr.Nam called about his
stationery order. He wanted you to call
him at 8634028.

+ Taken by: Mr. Toan
- correct and copy
- Listen

- Work in groups
* Answers.
+ Date:...
+ Time:...
+ For: Nancy

+ Message: Tom called about playing
tennis this afternoon. He will come over
to pick you up at 1.30

+ Taken by: Lisa
c.Post

Writ
ing

*cosolidation(5')

- Summarizes the main content:
write a telephone message

* Note.- Date
-Time
-Who sent
-To whom
- Content

- Listen and remember

d. Home work (2')
- Write the message on their note books.
- Do Ex6+7 (18-19)

</div>
(27)<div class='page_container' data-page=27>

preparation:3/9/10 presentation:7/9/10 class8,b
9/9/10 class8c,a

Period 11: Unit 2: making arrangements.
Lesson 5: Language focus

1. The aims of the lesson.
a. Knowledge

- By the end of the lesson, studenets will be able to complete a telephone message by
listening and further practice in adverbs of places.

*. Grammar.
- Simple past tens

b,
Skills.

- 4 skills, but pay attention to listening skill
c.attitue:

help Ss love lesson
2. Preparation.

a. Teacher: Text book, poster

b,
Students: Books and note books

3. 3.proceduce 
a/ Check the old lesson ( 5')

* Question: Checks some students' exercise books.

* Key: ( Omit )

* Mark: Checks, remarks and gives marks.
b/ The new lesson

Teacher's activities Students' activities

Stage Warm-up (2')

" Telephone transmitting"
- Devides Ss into 2 teams, chooses
6 volunteers from each team shows
the first student (in each line) a
telephone number.

Eg:

S1. 844552
S2. 844525

- Stand in 2 lines, whisper the
telephone number to the next
person in his/ her line, the
second student whispers to the
third ...The last student shouts
out the numbers. If it is the same
as the number T shows, that
team wins the match

1.1Pre-Listen
Ing

- Asks Ss to look at the form of the
telephone message (21) and stes
the scence: " A woman phoned the
principal of Kingston Junior High

1.Fill in the missing
information(16')

- Look at the form of the
telephone message

</div>
(28)<div class='page_container' data-page=28>

School, but he was out ".
- Asks Ss to guess the message
-Gets Ss listen to the tape twiceand
then fill in the message.

? How do you fill in the message ?
- Checks and remarks

* Jumbled words.

- Hangs the poster of the words
with disordered letters on the board
and tells the Ss that they are
adverbs of place.

Eg.

1. sdeousi 4. erhe
2. siiden 5. stupairs
3. hetre 6. wonstairds

- Listen to the tape (2 Ts)

Work in pairs then fill in the
message

- Compare or share with their
guess

* Answers.

+ Kingston Junior High
School

+ Date:
+ Time:

+ For: The principal

+ Message: Mrs.Mary Nguyen
wanted to see you telephone
number.64683720942

- Correct and copy

- Listen to Tand go to board and

write the meaning ful words
* Answers.

1. outside 4. here
2. inside 5. upstairs
3. there 6. downstairs
1.2While

Listen
ing

- Asks Ss to do Ex3 (26)

- Sets the scence. " Ba is playing
hide and seek with his cousin Mr.
Tuan. Use the adverbs of place to
complete the speech bubbles"

? How do you complete the speech
bubbles ?

- Listens and remarks

2. Complete the speech
bubbles (15')

- Worrk in groups
- Compare or share
* Answers.

a. Where is Tuan ? I think he is
upstairs.

No, he isn't here

c. He isn't downstairs and He
isn't upstairs

d. Perhaps he's outside
e. No, he's not there

f. I'm not outside. I'm inside. Ba.
- Correct and copy

-

Pre-Prac
tice

- Asks Ss to do exercise language
focus 1 (25)

- Gives an example first
Eg:

T: Nga has a movie ticket. What is
she going to do ?

S: She's going to see a movie
- Lets them work in pairs

1. Further practice( 15')
- Listen

- Practise with their partners
- Worrk in pairs

* Answers.

a. They are going fishing
b,

</div>
(29)<div class='page_container' data-page=29>

? How do you ask and answer ?

- Listens and remarks

novel

c. She's going to do her home
work

d. He's going to watch an action
movie on T.V to night

e. She's going to give him a
birthday present

- Correct and copy
- Model sentences

Are you going to see a movie ?
Yes, I am

No, I'm not.

a. See a movie v

b. Play sports x

c. meet your friends v
d. Help your mother v
e. Do your homework x

f. Watch TV x

- Models two cues then asks Ss to
repeat chorall then individually

2. Word cue drill ( 20')

- Listen and study the model
sentences

- Work in pairs

c.Post

Prac

tice

*cosolidation(3')

- Sets the scence."Ba and Bao are
making arrangements to play
chess, How do you complete the
dialoguege ?"

- Listens and remarks

- Listen, then practise with their
partners.( Role play: S1 is ba, S2
is Bao )

- Correct the mistakes
d. Home work (9)

-Write 5 sentences that you intend to do next week
- Do Ex 2+3 (15-16)

- Prepare Unit 3: Listen and read + Language focus 1

* Guidings:- Read the text, then find out the new words or new structures.
? What will we study ?

</div>
(30)<div class='page_container' data-page=30>

10.9.2012class8a,b

Period 12: Unit 3: At home

Period14:Getting started +Listen and read
1.The aims of the lesson.

a. Knowledge

- By the end of the lesson, studenets will be able to understand the dialogue and use modal
verbs to about the home work

. Grammar.

- Modal verbs: must, have to, ought to
* Intonation:

Eg:- I have to go and visit Grandma after work
- You ought to go to the market yourself...
- Can you call Aunt Chi, please

b,
Skills.

- 4 skills, but pay attention to listening and reaing skills.
c.attitue:

Ss love lesson
2. Preparation.

a. Teacher: Text book, pictures

b,
Students: Books and note books

3. 3.proceduce 
a. Check the old lesson (5')

* Question: Write 4 sentences about your house, using adverbs of place.
( calls on 2 Ss)

* Keys. (omit)

* Mark: Checks, remarks and gives mark

b, 
The new lesson

Teacher's activities Students' activities

Stage Warm-up( 3' )

" Kim game "

- Shows 6 pictures ( Getting started )
to Ss, asks them to look at 6 pictures
quickly, then remember the verbs in

</div>
(31)<div class='page_container' data-page=31>

the pictures.

Pre-Prac

tice

- Introduces the new words

?Do you know the meaning of
words?

- Writes and say the meaning of
words? ( by explaining,example )
- Gets Ss read the new words
-Lisstens and remarks

1. New words (8')

+ cup board(n). chạn bát
+ saucepan(n). cái chảo
+ steamer(n). nồi hấp
+ sink(n).bồn rửa bát

+ rice cooker(n). nồi cơm điện
+ chore(n). việc nhà

- Read and remember
+ Read in chorus (1-2 Ts)
+ Read individually (3-4 Ss)
- Correct the mistakes

- Listen and remember

While

Prac
tice

- Guides Ss the intonation
of some sentences.

Eg:

+I have to go and visit
Grandma after work

+You ought to go to the
market yourself...

+ Can you call Aunt Chi,
please ?

- Reads the first time
- Gets ss to the dialogue
- Asks them to complete
the list of the things nam
has to do.

? What things have Nam to
do ?

- Introduces the form

? What do you have to do ?
Eg: I must do the

washing up

or: I have to do the
washing up

- Asks Ss to practise by
using the picture cues drill
(a-f)

- Gives Ss 7 words
1. feed 4. tidy

2. Complete the list of the
thing Nam has to do (25')
- Listen to T and remember
- Practise following T in
chorus

- Look at the book and
listen

- Complete the list
* Answers.

Nam has to:
- cook dinner

- go to the market to by
fish and vegetables

- call his aunt Chi and ask
her to meet her mother at
Grandmother's house.
* Form.

Have to

+ V(inf) = Must + V(inf)
Has to

( Phải làm gì)
- Work in pairs

- Complete the dialogue
(34)

* Answers.

1. must study 4. have to
clean

</div>
(32)<div class='page_container' data-page=32>

2. empty 5. sweep
3. do 6. clean
7. dust

- Asks Ss to look at the
pictures and complete the
dialogue between Nga and
Lan, using "must" or "have
to" to gether with the verbs

given

- Checks and remarks

3. must sweep 6. must
feed

- Work in pairs to practise
the dialogue

- Corrrect the mistakes

c.Post
Prac
tice

*cosolidation(2')

- Summarizes the main content. use
the modal verbs to talk about the
house work

- Listen

-Repractise the dialogue
d. Home work (2')

-Write the things you have to do n sundays

( Eg: On sunday morning, I have to tidy my room....)

- Do Ex 1 (20)

- Prepare Unit 2: Speak

Date of preparing: 10.9.2012 Date of teaching:13.9.2012 class8c
:14.9.2012 class8b
:15.9.2012 class8a

:

Unit 3: At home

Period 13: Speak
1. The aims of the lesson.

a. Knowledge

- By the end of the lesson, studenets will be able to use the preposition of place to talk about
the positions of furniture in the house.

Grammar.

- Preposition of place
* Intonation:

Eg:-The fruit is in the bowl
-The plate is on the table

- Let's put the armchair opposite the couch

Skills.

</div>
(33)<div class='page_container' data-page=33>

c.attitue:

Ss love lesson
2. Preparation.

a. Teacher: Text book, pictures

b,
Students: Books and note books

3.proceduce

a. Check the old lesson (5')

* Question: Write the things you have to do on Sundays.
* Key: ( Omit )

* Maerk: Checks, remarks and gives mark

b, 
The new lesson

Teacher's activities Students' activities

Stage Warm-up( 3')

" Kim's game "

- Shows the picture of a kitchen (28)
to students, Asks them to study the
things in the picture. Takes away
the picture and asks Ss to write
down as many things as they can
remember.

-Divide into 2 teams, look at the
picture (28), write down as many
things as they can remember.

1.1Pre-Speak
ing

- Asks Ss the position of the items
in the pictures.

? Where is the clock ?
Where is the fruit ?

Where is the rice cooker ?
Where is the cup board ?
Where is the dish rack ?
Where are the flowers ?
Whereare the knives ?
- Listens and remarks

1. The position of each items
(10')

- Discuss in groups or pairs
* Answers.

+ It's above the fridge
+ It's in the bowl
+ It's on the table

+ It's next to the bowl of fruit
+ It's on the wall, above the
counter

+ It's on the wall, under the cup
board

+ It's on the counter, next to the
bowl of fruit

- Remember
1.2While

Speak
ing

- Sets the scence. " Mrs.Vui bought
a new furniture for her living room,
but she can't dicide where to put it.
you should help her to arrange the
furniture".

- Asks ss to look at the picture and

2. Arrange the furniture (20')
- Look at the picture and talk about
their ideas

Eg:

</div>
(34)<div class='page_container' data-page=34>

talk about their ideas.

? How do you speak your ideas?
* Guides.

- If you agree you may use:
+ Ok.

+ You are right

- If you disagree you may use:
+ No, I think we'd better/
ought to put...

+ I think it should be...
- Listens and remarks

T.V and the stereo on the selff.
+ I think the coffee table should
be between the counch and the
armchair.

+ Let's put the telephone next to
the couch.

+ I think we should put the
magazines above the books on the
shelves.

I think the shelves ought to be at
one of the corners, opposite the
couch.

- Practise the sentences
- Correct and copy

c.Post

Speak
ing

*cosolidation(5')

- Summarizes the main content: use
and review the preposition of place
to talk about the position of
furniture in the house.

- Listen

- Repractice
d. Home work (2')

- Describe your living room (30-60 words)
- Do Ex 6+7 (25-26)

- Prepare Unit 3: Read + Language focus4

Date of preparing:10.9.2012 Date of teaching:16.9.2012 class8c
:14.9.2012 class8b
:16.9.2012 class8a
Unit 3: At home

Period14: Listen 
1. The aims of the lesson.

</div>
(35)<div class='page_container' data-page=35>

- By the end of the lesson, studenets will be able to indentify the right items by listening and further 
practice in modal verb: Ought to

Grammar.

- Modal verb: Ought to

b, 
Skills

- 4 skills, but pay attention tolisteng and speaking skills. 
3. Grammar.

- Modal verb: Ought to

2. Preparation.

a. Teacher: Text book, posters, cattset

b, 
Students: Books and note books

3. PROCEDUCE

a. Check the old lesson (5')

* Question: Do exrcise 3 ( 23 ): a-b-c
* Key: ( Omit )

* Mark: Checks, remarks, then gives mark

b, 
The new lesson

Teacher's activities Students' activities

Stage Warm-up ( 3' )

" Bingo"

- Prepare a list of food, then calls out
each word in aloud voice.

Eg: chicken, beef, cake, candy, garlic,
noodles, bread, rice, ham. peas...

- Write down on their note book 5
things they can eat, then listen
carefully.If any one has the same
things, they cross them out.

1.1Pre
Prac
tice

- Gets Ss to look at th picture (30)and
guess 4 things they use to cook the
"special chinese Fried Rice".

- Gives feed back

- Gets ss to listen to the tape

- Checks and remarks

- Sets the scence. " Hoa is very sad
because failed her English test. What
do you say to advise her ?"

" You should study harder "

?Can you tell me another word for
"should" ?

+ Should <=> Ought to: nên làm

1. Check the right items (15')
- Guess 4 things

- Listen to the tape (2 Ts)
- Check their prediction
* Answers.

a. Fruit Rice
b,

Pan

c. Garlic and green peppers
d. Ham and peas

- Correct and copy
- Listen and remember

* Use: "Ought to" as well as "Should".
Dùng để đa ra lời khuyên ( nên làm....)
*Form.

Ought to + V(bare-inf)
1.2While

Prac

tice - Asks Ss to give an advice to peaple inthe pictures (35)
- Gets them to practise 4 exchanges in

pairs

- Checks and remarks

2. The advices (15')
- Work in pairs
* Answers.

a. You ought to study harder
b,

You ought to get up earlier

c. You ought to eat more fruit and
vegetables.

d. You ought to see a dentist
- Correct and copy

</div>
(36)<div class='page_container' data-page=36>

Prac

tice - Summarizes the main content:Further practice in modal verb
"Ought to".

- Listen and repractise
d. Home work (2')

- Write some advice when your friend feels sick
 - Do Ex 2 (20)

- Prepare Unit 3: write

preparing: 10.9.2012 Date of teaching::16.9.2012 class8c
:16.9.2012 class8b
:15.9.2012 class8a

Unit 3: At home

Period 15: Read 
1. The aims of the lesson.

a. Knowledge.

- By the end of the lesson, studenets will be able to understand the safety precautions in the
house and use "why-because"

Structure: Why-because
* Intonation:

Eg:-You must put all chemicals and drugs in locked cup boards, children may
drink or eat these things because they look like soft drinks or candy.

b, 
Skills.

- 4 skills, but pay attention to reading
c.attitue:

Ss love lesson
2 Preparation.

a. Teacher: Text book, pictures, realias.

b,
Students: Books and note books

3.proceduce

a Check the old lesson (5')

* Question: Describe your living room.
* Key: ( Omit )

* Mark: Checks, remarks then gives mark.
b.The new lesson

Teacher's activities Students' activities

Stage Warm-up( 3')

" Brain storming"
- Asks Ss to find out the

more dangers. - Find out the more dangers.

1.1Pre-Read

ing - Introduces the new words
? Do you know the meaning

of words ?

- Writes and says the

1. New words. (7')

+ Precaution (n). Sự phòng ngừa, đề phòng
+ socket (n). ổ cắm điện, đui đèn

+ match (n). Diªm
+ safety (adj). An toàn
+ destroy (v). Phá huỷ
Danger in the

home for

</div>
(37)<div class='page_container' data-page=37>

meaning of words ( by
explaining, example..)

- Lets Ss practise the new
words.

+ injune (v). Làm bị thơng, chấn th¬ng
- Read and remember

+Read followingTin chorus(1-2 Ts)
- Read individually (3-4 Ss)

1.2While
Read

ing - Guides Ss the intonation ofsome sentences
-You must put all chemicals
and drugs in locked cup
boards, children may drink
or eat these things because
they look like soft drinks or
candy.

- Reads the first time
- Gets Ss practise the text
- Asks Ss to read the
statements and guess which
is true, which is false ?

- Gives feed back

- Asks Ss to read the poster
and check their prediction,
then correct if the statement
is lalse.

2. True/ False statements prediction (8')
- Listen

-Read followingT in chorus(1-2 Ts)
- Read in silent (2')

- Read and guess, ( work in groups)
- Compare or share

* Answers.

Stt Guess Answer Correction

a F - to keep medicine

in locked...

b T

c F ...is dangerous place

d F ...cause a fire

e T

f T

- Correct and copy

- Asks Ss to work in pairs to
find out the answers of these
questions.

? How do you answer the
questions a?b?....e?

- Calls on some Ss to write
their answers.

- Checks and remarks

3. Comprehention questions (15')
- Worrk in pairs

* Answers.

a. Because children often to eat and drink
them

Because the kitchen is a dangerous place.
c. Because playing with one match can
cause the fire

d. Because children often try to put some
thing into electrical sockets and electricity
can kill.

e. Because the dangerous objects can
injune or kill children.

- Correct and copy
c.Post

Read
ing

*cosolidation(4')

- Summarizes the main
content: Understand the
safety precaution in the
house

- Asks them to work in pairs
and discussing about the
topic: Safety precaution in
the street/ at school.

- Listen

- Discuss in pairs/ groups

d.Home work (3')

- Practise in "Why-question with because- answer by doing the
exercise language focus 4

- Do Ex 5+6 (24-25)

- Prepare Unit 3: Language focus 3

</div>
(38)<div class='page_container' data-page=38>

Date of preparing:16.9.2012 Date of teaching::19.9.2012 class8c
:20.9.2012 class8b
:21.9.2012 class8a

Unit 3: At home

Period 16: Write
1.The aims of the lesson.

a. Knowledge.

- By the end of the lesson, studenets will be able to write a desciption of a room in their house.
-Grammar.

Reflexive pronouns

b,
Skills.

- 4 skills, but pay attention to writing skill.
c.attitue:

Ss love lesson
2. Preparation.

a. Teacher: Text book, pictures

b,
Students: Books and note books

3.proceduce

a.Check the old lesson (5')

* Question: Write 4 sentences when your friend has toothache.

* Key: ( Omit )

* Mark: Checks, remarks and gives mark

b, 
The new lesson

Teacher's activities Students' activities

Stage Warm-up ( 2' )

" Chatting"

- Asks Ss some things about the room (32)
Eg: ? Which room is this ?

What is this ?
Where is it ?

- Look at the picture (32) and answer

1.1Pre
-Writ
ing

- Introduces the new words

?Do you know the meaning of them

- Writes and says the meaning of them ( by

pictures.)

- Gets Ss read the new words

1. New words (5')
+ folder(n).

+ beneath(pre).phÝa díi

+ towal rack(n). giá để khăn lau
+dish rack(n).giá để đĩa

+lighting fixture(n). đèn chùm
- Read and remember

1.2While
Writ
ing

- Asks Ss to read the description of Hoa's
room, then asks some comprehention
questions.

1. What is there on the left of the room?
2. Where is the book shelf?

3. What is there on the right side of the
room ?

2.Reading (7')

- Look at and answer
* Answers.

1. There is a desk on the left of the
room

2. The book shelf is above the desk

</div>
(39)<div class='page_container' data-page=39>

4. Where is the ward robe ?
- Listens and remarks

4. The ward robe is beside the window
and opposite the desk

- Correct the mistakes
- Asks Ss to describe Hoa's kitchen, using

the given cues

- Moves around the class and helps them

- Calls on some Ss to write their sentences
- Checks and remarks

3. Writing (20')

- Write the description of the kitchen (33)
- Work individually

* Answers.

+ This is Hoa's kitchen

+ There is a refregerator in the right
corner of the room

+ Next to the refregerator are the stove
and the oven

+ On the other side of the oven, there is
a sink and next to the sink is a stove
rack

+ The dish rack stands on the counter,
on the right of the window and beneath
the shelves

+ On the shelves and on the counter
beneeath the window, there are jars of
sugar, flowr and tea

+ In the middle of the kitchen, there are
a table and fuor chairs

+ The lighting fixture in a vase with
flowers

- Share and compare
- Correct and copy
c.Post

Writ
ing

*cosolidation(4')

- Summarizes the main content: Write a
description of the room

- Listen

- Talk their partner about their room
d. Home work (2')

- Write a description of their room
- Do Ex 7(26)

- Prepare the new lesson: Revise all the old grammar structures
which you've learnt in English 6-8

Date of preparing:17.9.2012 Date of teaching:23.9.2012 class8c,a
:21.9.2012 class8b

Period 17: Language focus

1. The aims of the lesson.

a.. Knowledge.

- By the end of the lesson, studenets will be able to use the reflexive pronouns.
 Grammar.

</div>
(40)<div class='page_container' data-page=40>

b.Skills.

- 4 skills, but pay attention to speaking skill.
c.attitue:

help Ss love lesson
2. Preparation.

a.Teacher: Text book. 
b.Students: Books and note books

3.proceduce

a.Check the old lesson (5')

* Question: Do Exercise language focus 4 (37)
* Key: b-c-d-e

* Mark: Checks, remarks, then gives mark 
b.The new lesson

Stage Teacher's activities Students' activities

Warm-up ( 3' )
" Brainstorming "
- Asks Ss to find out the

things they

- can do and can't do

- Find out more things can / can't do

1.1pre- practice - Sets the scence. " You do your
home work and no one help you.
What do you say ?"

+I do my home worrk my selff 
- Explains the reflexive pronouns
+ Đại từ phản thân dùng để chỉ một
hành động quay trở lại chính chủ
ngữ của câu ( chủ ngữ và tân ngữ là
một )

+ Đứng sau động từ hoặc giới từ

1.-Listen and remember(8')
* Form.

I Myself

You Yourself
Yourselves
He Himself
She Herself
We Ourselves
They Themselves
It Itself

- Asks ss to practise the questions

and then answer.

a. You/ do/ home work/ ?

-> Did you do your home work ?
Yes, I did it my self

b,

You/ fix/ washing machine.
c. Mary/ cook/ dinner.

d. These students/ paint/ the pictures.
e. You/ do your chores.

?How do you practise the questions

2. Word cue drill ( 8')

- Run through the vocabulary first
- Work in pairs. (S1 asks, S2 answers).
b.

S1: Did you fix the washing machine ?
S2: Yes, I fixed it myself

c.

S1: Did Mary cook the dinner ?
S2: Yes, She cooked it herself
d.

S1: Did these students paint the pictures ?
S2: Yes, They painted them them selves.
e.

S1: Did you do your chores ?
Things you

can do

</div>
(41)<div class='page_container' data-page=41>

and then answers?

- Calls on some pairs to check
- Remarks and corrects

S2: Yes, we did ourselves 
- Correct and copy

1.2while practice

- Asks Ss to fill in the blanks with
suitable reflexive pronouns or
emphasic pronouns.

?How do you complete the
dialogues?

- Checks and remarks

3. Complete the dialogues ( 8')
- Practise speaking in pairs
* Answers.

a. (0): himself
b,

(1): ourselves

c. (2): myself / (3): yourself
d. (4): himself / (5): herself 
 (6); themselves

</div>
(42)<div class='page_container' data-page=42>

1.3.post practice

c.consolidation(5 )’

- Gets Ss to look at th picture
(30)and guess 4 things they use to
cook the "special chinese Fried Rice".
- Gives feed back

- Gets ss to listen to the tape

- Checks and remarks

- Sets the scence. " Hoa is very sad
because failed her English test. What

do you say to advise her ?"

" You should study harder "

?Can you tell me another word for
"should" ?

+ Should <=> Ought to: nªn lµm
- Asks Ss to give an advice to peaple
in the pictures (35)

- Gets them to practise 4 exchanges
in pairs

- Checks and remarks
-remide main knowledge

- Asks Ss to give an advice to peaple in
the pictures (35)

- Gets them to practise 4 exchanges in
pairs

- Checks and remarks

4. The advices (7')
- Work in pairs
* Answers.

-remember

d. Home work (3')

- Write 3 sentences with reflexive pronouns and 3 sentences
 with emphasic pronouns.

</div>
(43)<div class='page_container' data-page=43>

Date of preparing: 1.10.2012 Date of teaching:6.10.2012 class8,a
4.10.2012 class8b

5.10.2012 class8c
 Period 18:

review of knowledge

1. Aims: 
a.Knowledge:

- By the end of the lesson, ss can review of all khowledge they learned from unit
1 to unit 3.

b.skill:

ss can review of all skill they learned from unit 1 to unit 3
c.attitue:

Ss love lesson.
 
2. Teaching aids

a. T: Lesson plan, …

b,
Ss: Books,…

3. procedure

a. Checking pre-lesson
. Qs

. Answers

b, 
Today’slesson

Stage Teacher’s activities Student’s activities
* Warm up (7’)

-Ask ss questions:
+ Where did Hoa live?
+ Where doas she live now?
-Review of present simple and
past simple tense, modal verbs,

…

- Let ss do exercises

Nam… (1)(live) in Son La last
year, but now he… (2)(live) in
Song Ma. Yesterday, his friend,
Hung …(3)(send) he a letter.

-Answer

-Take note

I. Exercises

</div>
(44)<div class='page_container' data-page=44>

Hung …(4)(be) Nam’s
neighbor when Nam lived in
Son La

- Call on ss to anwer. Then give
them corrections

a. What are you going to do
this afternoon?

b,
Will you play football with me?
c. Did you do your homework?
- Have ss to practice in pairs
- Call on SS to answer

a. This/ Hoa’s kitchen/ is

b,
There/ refregarator/ on the/
room/ right conner/ is a.

c.The/ next to/ refregarator/ is/

stove.

- Call on ss to answer. Then
give them the corrections.

Eg. We have to do chores.
He must go home

I ought to eat vegetables

1. lived
2. lives
3. Sent
4. Was

II. Ex2. Answer the questions (9’)

- Practice
- Answer

III.Ex3.Put the words in each
sentence in order. (9’)

- Do exercise in pairs
- Answer. Then take note

IV. Write some sentences using
modal verbs (9’)

- Do exercise

c.consolidation:

</div>
(45)<div class='page_container' data-page=45>

Learn and prepare for the fist test (2’)

Date of preparing: 1.10.2012 Date of teaching:6.10.2012 class8,a
8.10.2012 class8b

8.10.2012 class8c

Period 19: the exam
1. The aims of the lesson.

- By the end of the lesson, studenets will be able to revise all the old grammar structures
-Helps ss to understand the commands of the questions, can practise them correctly and

fluently

a.Knowledge:

- By the end of the lesson, ss can review of all khowledge they learned from unit
1 to unit 3.

b.skill:

ss can review of all skill they learned from unit 1 to unit 3
c.attitue:

Ss love lesson.

2 teaching aids

a. Teacher: Text book, qesstions and keys

b,
Students: Books and note books

3. procerude

* Settling organization the class (1')

Good morning ! Are you fine to day?
Who's absent to day?

a. Check the old lesson/ warm-up: (omit)

b.The new lesson .(44') §Ị Sè 2: líp 8B,C
Questions Answers
1. Supply the correct form of verbs.

a. Next year, my mother and I (visit)...(1).... our
relatives in the coñnty sides.

b,
her father (watch)....(2)... a good film on T.V at 8
last night.

c. What you (learn)...(3)... at the moment ?

1. (2 points)

a. C

</div>
(46)<div class='page_container' data-page=46>

d. Hoa usually (not go)....(4)...home early.
2. Rewrite the following sentences

a. Their daughter write this report in 3 hours.
( It take(s)...)

b,
We will clean the floor about thirty minutes.

( It take(s)...)

c. The boy is strong. He can lift this table.
( enough + to-inf....)

3. Choose the best answer, then circle the 
correct answer.

a. Next some days it...

A. rain B,
rains C. will rain

b,
They ought to ...

A. learn hard B,
hard learn C. learns hard

c. The boy cut his hair by...

A. it self B,
her self C. him self

d. It... us about 2 days to prepare that work
next week

A. takes B,
took C. will take

4. Read the passage carefully,then do the 
exercises

In the restaurant

Let's go into this restaurant. Let's sit at this table.
How white the table cloth is! Let's ask the waiter
for the menu. What are you going to have ? We
are very hungry. we will begin with the rice, then
the waiter will bring us a dish of salad, cheese and
some eggs. We will drink red wine or white wine
and we will finish the meal with a cup of good
coffee.

A/ Make T/ F for each statement.

a. The waiter will bring them a dish of salad, fish
and an egg.

b,
They will drink red wine, white wine and a cup of

2. ( 2 points)

a. will visit
b,
watched

c. are you learning
d. doesn't go
1. (2 points)

a. C
b,
A
c. C
d. C

3. ( 2 points)

a. It took their daughter 3
hours to write this report.
b,

It will take us about 30
minutes to clean the floor.
c. The boy is strong enough
to lift this table.

4. ( 4 points)
A. (2 points)

a. F
b.T

B,
(2 points)

a. They are in the
restaurant, because they are
hungry.

The waiter will help them
have a meal.

</div>
(47)<div class='page_container' data-page=47>

good coffee.

B/ Answer the questions.
a. Where are they? and why ?

b,
Who will help them have a meal ?

c. What will they drink ?

---Date of preparing: 8.10.2012 ---Date of teaching:13.10.2012 class8,a
12.10.2012 class8b

11.10.2012 class8c

Period 20: coment on the test
 1.The aims of the lesson.

- By the end of the lesson, studenets will be able to use prepositions of time to talk about the
action which always happens.

a.Knowledge:

*Vocabularies. (omit)
*. Grammar.

- Prepositions of time

b,
Skills.

- 4 skills, but pay attention to writing and speaking skills.
c.attitue:

help Ss love lesson
2. teaching aids

a. Teacher: Text book

b,
Students: Books and note books

3. PROCEDUCE

* Settling organization the class (1')

Good morning ! Are you fine to day?
Who's absent to day?

</div>
(48)<div class='page_container' data-page=48>

T: Writes some prepositions in a list and the time / date/ month....Then calls on some Ss come
to the board to match the items.

Eg: In January
On 3 p.m

At Wednessday
Between November 1997
After/ before July 2 nd

6 a.m

7 a.m and 9 a.m
Ss: Match the items.

b.The new lesson

Teacher's activities Students' activities
Stage

Question1.
1.c-will rain
2.a-learn hard
3.c-him self
4.c-will take
Question2.
1.will visit
2.watched

3.are you learning
4.doesn't go
Question3

1.It took their daughter 3 hours to
write this report.

2. It will take us about thirty minutes
to clean the floor.

3. The boy is not strong enough to
lift this table.

4. She isn't intelligent enough to do
the exam

Question4.

1. a-F / b-T

2.a/ They are in the restaurant,
because they are very hungry.

b/ The waiter will help them have a
meal.

c/ They will eat a dish of salad,
cheese, rice and some eggs.

c.consolidation(2')

- Consolidates all the lesson: Revise
the prepositions of time.

1. Correct the written test (35')
- Write out all the main tenses and
structures.

* Tenses

1. Simple future tense
2. Simple past tense

3. Simple present continuous tense
4.Simple present tense

* Structures.

1. It take(s) + some one + time +
to-inf

2. (not) + adj + enough + to-inf
- Listen and copy

-> Simple future
-> Simple past

-> Present continuous
-> Simple present

</div>
(49)<div class='page_container' data-page=49>

?Who can make up 3 sentences by
using prepositions: at/ before/
between.

->S + to be + (not) + adj + enough +
to-inf

- Listen and remember
- Make up the sentences

d. Home work (2')

- Do Ex3+7 (28-29)

- Write 8 sentences by using prepositions of time

- Prepare Unit 5: Getting stared + Listen and read

Date of preparing: 8.10.2012 Date of teaching:14.10.2012 class8,a
15.10.2012 class8b

15.10.2012 class8c

Unit4 : our past

Period 21: Getting started + Listen and read
1. The aims of the lesson.

- By the end of the lesson, studenets will be ableto tell the activities people used to do in the
past

a.Knowledge:

*Vocabularies

(n). equipment, folk tale, traditional, great grandma
(v). look after

* Grammar.

</div>
(50)<div class='page_container' data-page=50>

- Structure: Used to
* Intonation:

Eg:- What was life like then ?

- What did Great grandma do ?
- That sound like hard work ?
b. Skills.

- 4 skills, but pay attention to listening and reading skills.
c.attitue:

help Ss love lesson
2. Teaching aids.

a. Teacher: Text book, pictures.
b.Students: Books and note books

3.PROCEDURE

* Settling organization the class (1')

Good morning ! Are you fine to day?
Who's absent to day?

a. Check the old lesson/ warm-up (5 ) ’
" Chatting"

T:Asks Ss to look at the picture (on page 38) and write the names of the things that do not be
long to the past.

Eg: What things do not be long to the past ?
Ss: Write down

b. The new lesson

Teacher's activities Students' activities
Stage

Eg:

- Introduces the new words

? Do you know the meaning of
words ?

- Writes and says the meaning of
words ( by explaining, example,
translation)

- Lets Ss practise the new words.

- Guides Ss the intonation of some
sentences

+What was life like then ? +
What did Great grandma do ?
+That sound like hard work ?

1. New words. (7')

+ equipment (n). Trang thiết bị
+ folk tale (n). Truyện dân gian
+ traditional (adj). Trun thèng
+ great grandma (n). Cơ bµ

+ great grand father (n). Cụ ông
+ look after (v). Chăm sãc, tr«ng
nom

- Read and remember

+Read followingTin chorus(1-2 Ts)
- Read individually (3-4 Ss)

2. True/ False statements
prediction (8')

- Listen and remember

-practise followingT in chorus

</div>
(51)<div class='page_container' data-page=51>

- Reads the first time

- Gets Ss practise the sentences

- Asks Ss to read the statements and
predict they are T or F

* Statements.

1. Nga used to live on a farm.

2. Nga's grandma didn't go to school.
3. She had an easy and happy life
when she was young.

4. There wasn't any modern
equipment at her time.

5. " The lost shoe" is a short story
- Asks them to read the dialogue
again and check their prediction
- Remarks and corrects

- Asks Ss to ask and answer the
questions.

?How do you practise the questions ?

- Calls on some pairs to check

- Listens and remarks

- Asks Ss to read the statements
(part3-39) and decide which is a fact

* Answers.

St Guess Answer Corection
1.

2.
3.
4.
5.

T
F
T
F

-Grandma
used to live
on farm
- She had a
hard life
-It is an old
folk tale
- Read and check

- Correct the falsse statements
- Share and compare

- Correct and copy

3. Comprehention questions (15')
- Work in pairs.(S1asks,S2 answers

*questions

S2. answers

- She used to live on a
farm.

-Because she had to
stay at home and help
her mom to look after
her younger brothers
and sisters

- She used to cook the
meals, clean the house
and wash the clothes.
-Her great grandma
used to lit the l©mpnd
her great grandfather
used to tell stories.
- She asked her
grandma to tell her
the tale "The lost
shoe".

- Correct and copy
4. Fact or opinion (7') 
- Read and decide

St Fact Opinion

</div>
(52)<div class='page_container' data-page=52>

and which is an opinion.

?How do you decide to check (v) ?
- Gives feed back

c.cosolidation(2')

- Summarizes the main content; tell
the activities people used to do in the
past.

b.
c.
d.
e.
f.

v
v
v

v
v
- Correct and copy

- Listen and remember

d.Home work (2')

- Read and translate the text
- Do Ex 1+2 (27-28)

- Prepare Unit 4: Speak + Language focus 4
---

Date of preparing: 1.10.2012 Date of teaching:3.10.2012 class8B,C

4.10.2012 class8D,A
5.10.2012 class8E

Unit4 : our past
Priod 22: Speak and listen
1. The aims of the lesson.

</div>
(53)<div class='page_container' data-page=53>

a.Knowledge:

. Vocabularies.(omit)
. Grammar.

- Simple past tense
- Structure: Used to

* Intonation:

Eg:- They used to live in the small houses.

- The children used to play the traditional games
b. Skills.

- 4 skills, but pay attention tÝtpeaking skill.
c.attitue:

help Ss love lesson
2. Teaching aids

a. Teacher: Text book, pictures.
b.Students: Books and note books

3.PROCEDUCE

* Settling organization the class (1')

Good morning ! Are you fine to day?
Who's absent to day?

a. Check the old lesson/ warm-up (5’)
* Question: Do Ex 4 (28)

* Key: a-G / b- C / c- D / d- A / e- B / f- F / g- E

* Mark: Checks, remarks and gives mark

b. The new lesson 
 Teacher's activities Students' activities

Stage Teacher's activities

- Recalls the coversation between
Nga and her grandma, then ask:
"Where did Nga's grandma always
live ?".

-> She always lived on a farm.
? Another word for "always lived "?
always lived = used to live

- Gives out the form and use.

- Gets Ss to use " used to " to make
question and answer.

Students' activities

1. Complete the dialogue (12')
- Answer.

" She always lived on a farm".
=> Used to live

Eg: Where did Nga's grandma use to

live ?

- She used to live on a farm.
* Form.

+/S + used to + V(inf) + C

-/S + did not + use to +V(inf) + C
?/Did + S + use to + V(inf) + C ?
( §· thờng làm gì trong quá khứ )
* Word cue drill.

</div>
(54)<div class='page_container' data-page=54>

Eg:

a. live/ Hue/ Ha Noi.
b,

have/ long hairs/ short hairs
c. get up/ late/ early

d. walk to school/ bicycle

e. study/ evening/ early morning
?How do you practise the sentences?

- Listens, remarks and corrects their

mistakes.

- Guides Ss the intonation of the
statements.

+ They used to live in the small
houses.

+ The children used to play the
traditional games ...

- Asks Ss to copare 2 pictures
(40),using "used to " to talk about
the action in the past.

- Gives out some questions

1. Where did they live in the past ?
and now ?

2. What's about electricity ?
3. How did they travel ?

4. What's about their life? work ?
5. Did children use to go to school?
6.What's about their entertainment?
- Moves around the class and help
them.

- Calls on 2 Ss to summarize the

main contents of the text

+ S1: Talks about the actions in the
past.

+ S2: Talks about the actions in now.
a.

S1. Did you use to live in Hue ?
S2. No, I used to live in Ha Noi
b.

S1. Did you use to have long hairs ?
S2. No, I used to have short hairs.
c.

S1. Did you use to get up late ?
S2. No, I used to get up early.
d.

S1. Did you use to walk to school ?
S2. No, I used to go to school by
bicycle.

S1. Did you use to study in the
evening ?

S2. No, I used to study in the early

morning.

- Correct and copy
2.Speaking (20')
- Listen and remember

- Practise following T in chorus
some times

- Copare and practise
- Work in pairs
- Give the ideas

1. Past: in small houses

Now: big houses and buildings
2. Past: walk

Now: cars, motor bikes...
3. Past: some wherre

Now: every where

4. Past: work hard all the time
Now: have a lot of time for
entertainment

5. Past: most stay at home
Now: go to school

6. Past: play traditional games
Now: play modern games
- Correct and copy

</div>
(55)<div class='page_container' data-page=55>

? Who can ?

- Listens and remarks

- Correct

c.cosolidation(3')

Consolidates the lesson:Talk about the things they usedto do in the past
 d.Home work (2')

- write about things you used to do last year
- Do Ex 2+6 (27-30)

- Prepare Unit 4: Read

* Guidings: - Read and find out the new words, new structures

- How to complete the sentences and answer the questions.
? What do we study about ?

---

Date of preparing: 1.10.2012 Date of teaching:5.10.2012 class8A,B
6.10.2012 class8D,E

3.10.2012 class8C

Unit4 : our past

Period23: Read
1. The aims of the lesson.

- By the end of the lesson, studenets will be able to understand and retell the story " The Lost
Shoe ".

a.Knowledge:

. Vocabularies
(n).fairy, rag

(v).fall in love with, change smt into smt
(adj). cruel, upset, magical

(adv). magically, immediately
. Grammar.

- Simple past tense
* Intonation:

Eg: Once a poor farmer had a daughter named Little Pea. After his wife died, the farmer
married again...

b. Skills.

- 4 skills, but pay attention to reading skill.
c.attitue:

help Ss love lesson

</div>
(56)<div class='page_container' data-page=56>

a. Teacher: Text book, word card for drilling.
b,Students: Books and note books
3.proceduce

* Settling organization the class (1')

Good morning ! Are you fine to day?
Who's absent to day?

a.Check the old lesson/ warm-up (5p) 
* Question: Write about things you used to do last year ( 6 sentences )

( Calls on 2 Ss )
* Key: ( Omit)

* Mark: Checks, remarks and gives mark

b. The new lesson
 Teacher's activities Students' activities

Stage

Eg:

- Introduces the new words and
structures

? Do you know the meaning of
words ?

- Writes and says the meaning of
words ( by explaining, example,
translation)

- Explains 2 structures

+ and the prince immediately fell in
love with her

+a fairy appeared and magically
changed Little Pea's rags into
beautiful clothes.

- Gets Ss practise the new words
- Guides Ss the intonation of some
sentences

+Once a poor farmer had a daughter
named Little Pea. After his wife
died, the farmer married again...
- Lets Ss practise the sentences

- Asks Ss to read the statements and

guess which is true, which is falsse.
then share with their partners

* Make T/ F for each statement.
1.Little Peas's father is a poor farmer.
2.Her father got married again after
his wife died.

1. New words. (7')
+fairy(n). ông bụt

+rag (n). quần áo rách rới

+to fall in love with(str). đem lòng
yêu ai
+to change smt into smt(str).biến cái
gì thành cái gì
+cruel (adj). c ỏc

+ upset (adj). buồn giàu
+ magical (adj). kì diệu

+magically (adv). một cách kì diệu
+ immediately (adv). ngay lập tức
- Read and remember

+Read followingTin chorus(1-2 Ts)
- Read individually (3-4 Ss)

2. True/ False statements

prediction (10')

- Listen

- Read followingT in chorus(1-2 Ts)
-Work in groups

- Gues and share after read the story
" The Lost Shoe " (41)

* Answers.

St Guess Answer Corection
1.

2.
3.

4.
5.

T
T
F

T
F

</div>
(57)<div class='page_container' data-page=57>

3.Her new mother was beautiful and
nice to her.

4.She worked hard all day.

5.She didn't have new clothesto take
part in the festival.

- Asks ss to correct the falsse
statements

- Checksand remarks

- Asks Ss to work in pairs and answer
the questions in Ex 2(42)

?How do you answer the questions
a? b?->e?

- Calls some pairs to check
- Listens and remarks

- Asks ss to fill the blanks with
suitable words from the story to
complete the sentences.

?What words do you choose to fill in
the blanks of the sentences ?

- Checks and remarks

her beautiful

clothes
- Correct and copy

3. Comprehention questions (8')
- Work in pairs.(S1asks,S2 answers

*questions

S2. answers
a.

b.
c.

- She was a poor
farmer's daughter
-She made her do the
chores all day

- Before the festival
started, a fairy

appeared and

magically changed
her rags into beautiful
clothes.

-He dicided to marry
Little Pea because the
shoe which the Prince
was keeping fitted her
- No, it isn't. Because
ther is a fairy in the
story.

- Correct and copy
4. Gap-filling(7') 
- Discuss in groups
* Answers.

a. farmer

b,
died

c. had/ used-again
d. marry/ choose
e. new clothes
f. lost

</div>
(58)<div class='page_container' data-page=58>

c.cosolidation(2')
- Retell the story

-Asks ss to work in groups, telling the story again in details
 d.Home work (2')

- Rewrite the story

- Prepare Unit 4: Listen + Language 1-2
* Guidings:+ Review the simple past tense

? How to complete the dialogues ?

Date of preparing: 1.10.2012 Date of teaching:6.10.2012 class8B,C
7.10.2012 class8D,E,A

Unit4 : our past

Period24: Write
1. The aims of the lesson.

- By the end of the lesson, studenets will be able to usse the simple past tense to write a folk
tale.

a.Knowledge:
* Vocabularies:

(n).wisdom, stripe, straw, servant
(v).escape, grase, light

*. Grammar.
- Simple past tense
b. Skills.

- 4 skills, but pay attention to writing skill.
c.attitue:

help Ss love lesson

2. Preparation.

a. Teacher: Text book
b.Students: Books and note books

3.proceduce 
* Settling organization the class (1')

Good morning ! Are you fine to day?
Who's absent to day?

</div>
(59)<div class='page_container' data-page=59>

T: Asks Ss some questions about imaginary story ( folk tale ).
Eg: ? Do you want to read imaginary story ?

Which story do you like best ?
Name some of them ?

Have you ever read the story" How the tiger got his stripes" ?
Ss: Answer

b. The new lesson

Teacher's activities Students' activities

Stage

- Introduces the new words

? Do you know the meaning of
words ?

- Writes and says the meaning of
words ( by explaining, example,
translation)

- Gets Ss practise the new words

- Asks Ss the meaning of the verbs in
the box. then has them workin pairs.

?How do you complete the story ?

- Checks and corrects

- Ask Ss to discuss in pairs to answer
the questions

1.Wherre was the man ?

2.What did the buffalo do when the

tiger appeared ?

3.What did the tiger want to know?
4.What did he do before going
home ? why ?

5.What did he do when he
returned ?

- Listens and remarks

1. New words. (7')
+wisdom (n). trÝ kh«n
+ stripe (n). vết vằn, kẻ dọc
+ straw (n). rơm

+ servant (n). ngời hầu
+ escape (v). trốn thoát
+ grase (v). gặm cỏ
+ light (v) -> lit. đốt
- Read and remember
Ex1: Complete the story
- Answer

- Use suitable verbs to fill in the
blanks.

* Answers.

1. appeared / 6. tied

2. as / 7. lit
3. said / 8. burned
4. left / 9. escaped
5. went

- Correct and copy

Ex2: Comprehention questions
- Discuss in groups

- Answer the questions
* Answers.

1. He was in his field
2. It grazed near by

3. The tiger wanted to know why the
strong buffalo was the servant and
the smallman was the master

4. He tied the tiger to a tree with
rope because he didn't want it to eat
the buffalo.

5. When he returned. he lit the straw
to burn the tiger.

</div>
(60)<div class='page_container' data-page=60>

Eg:

- Asks Ss to do Ex2 (43)

- Guides Ss how to write
Eg: Changes: The man -> I
His -> my
...

-Moves around the class helps them
- Gives the suggested answers.

Once day, as I was in field and my
buffalo grazed near by, a tiger came.
It asked why the strong buffalo was
my servant and I was its master. I
told the tiger that I had something
called wissdom. The tiger wanted to
see it but I said that Ileft the
wissdom at home that day. Then I
tied the tiger to a tree with a rope
because I didn't want it to eat my
buffalo.I went to get some straw and
I burned the tiger. The tiger escaped,
but to day it still has black stripes
from the burn.

- Checks and remarks

2. Writing (15')

- Have to imagine to be a man in
order to write the story

- Work individualy

- Share with their partners

- Compare their writing with the
teacher's suggestedeanswers.

- Corect and copy
c.cosolidation(4')

- Asks Ss to tell the story

?How do you tell the story by role play ?
- Listens and remarks.

d.Home work (2')

- Write the story again imagine you are the tiger or the buffalo
- Prepare Unit 4: Language focus 3

Date of preparing: 7.10.2012 Date of teaching:10.10.2012 class8B,C
11.10.2012 class8D,A
12.10.2012 class8E

Unit4 : our past
Period 25: Language focus 
1. The aims of the lesson.

- By the end of the lesson, studenets will be able to understand the main idea of a story by
listening and further practice in past simple tense.

a.Knoledge:
* Vocabularies

</div>
(61)<div class='page_container' data-page=61>

(v).lay

(adj). fooolish, greedy
* Grammar.

- Simple past tense
 b. Skills.

- 4 skills, but pay attention to listening skill.
c.attitue:

help Ss love lesson

2. Preparation. 
a. Teacher: Text book, 11 cards

b,Students: Books and note books

3.proceduce

* Settling organization the class (1')

Good morning ! How are you to day?
Who's absent to day?

a. Check the old lesson/ warm-up (4’) 
* Question: Asks Ss to retell the story " The Lost Shoe "

* Key: ( Omit)

* Mark:Listens, remarks and gives mark

b. The new lesson 
 Teacher's activities Students' activities

Stage

- Introduces the new words

? Do you know the meaning of
words ?

- Writes and says the meaning of
words ( by explaining, example,
translation)

- Gets Ss practise the new words
- Asks Ss to look at 4 titles and guess
which is the most suitable to the
story ( a-b-c-d: 41), which they will
hear.

- Lets Ss listen to the tape twice, then
listen again to check

- Asks Ss: What tense is used in the
story ?

- Lets ss listen again and try to write

1. New words. (11')

+ amazement (n). S vui mng
+lay (v). trng

+fooolish (adj). Ngu đần
+ greedy(adj). Tham lam
- Read and remember

- Discuss in groups and guess
- Listen to the tape (2 Ts)
- Correct the mistakes
* Answers.

Don't be foolish and greedy

2. Practice(10')
- Answer

</div>
(62)<div class='page_container' data-page=62>

as many verbs as possible
? Can you write more verbs ?

- Asks Ss to give the infinitives of
these verbs

- Checks and remarks

- Sets the scence. " Lan asks Nga
about Nga's yesterday activities, now
you will use the simple past tense to
complete the dialogue."

?How do you complete the dialogue
a ? b ? c ? d ?

- Checks and remarks

* Answers.

+ went + were
+ discovered + ran
+ laid + looked
+ shouted + wanted
+ finished + decided
+ couldn't

Eg: + go

+ discover

...
- Correct and copy
- Listen to T

- Discuss in pairs to complete the
dialogues

* Answers.

a. Lan: Did you eat rice for lunch ?
b,

Nam: I rode to school by bicucle.
c. Minh: Where were you yesterday
evening ?

d. Ba: I have math.
- Correct and copy

- Asks Ss to do Ex3 (44), then copare
with their partners

?How do you complete the
sentences?

- Checks and remarks

- Asks Ss to make up sentences by
using prepositions of time: at -

after / before / between / /on /in.
* Cue words

a. They/ going/ have/ final exam/
June.

b,
I/ usually/ go to school/ 6 o'clock.
c. We/ have/ English lesson/

e. She usually listens to music on
Sunday morning

- Complete the sentences
- Correct and copy

3. Correct the written test (15')
- Write out all the main tenses and
structures.

* Tenses

1. Simple future tense
2. Simple present tense
3. Simple past tense

4. Simple present continuous tense
* Structures.

1. It take(s) + some one + time +

to-inf

</div>
(63)<div class='page_container' data-page=63>

Monday, Wednessday and Friday.
d. She/ usually/ listen/ music/ Sunday
morning

?How do you write the correct
sentences ?

- Calls on some Ss to write on the
black board

- Checks and remarks

- Asks ss to give out all the main
tenses and grammar structures which
are used in the test.

?Which tenses are used ?

?Which structures are used ?

- Gives out the correct answers of
each question.

Question1.

1.c-will rain / 5. c-worker

2.a-learn hard / 6.c-do...study
3.c-him self / 7.a-are

4.c-will take / 8.b-a good mark
Question2.

1.will visit
2.watched

3.are you learning
4.doesn't go
Question3

1.It took their daughter 3 hours to
write this report.

2. It will take us about thirty minutes
to clean the floor.

3. The boy is not strong enough to
lift this table.

4. She isn't intelligent enough to do
the exam

Question4.

1. a-F / b-T

2.a/ They are in the restaurant,

-> Simple future
-> Simple past

-> Present continuous
-> Simple present

-> It take(s) + some one + time +
to-inf

->S + to be + (not) + adj + enough +
to-inf

</div>
(64)<div class='page_container' data-page=64>

because they are very hungry.

b/ The waiter will help them have a
meal.

c/ They will eat a dish of salad,
cheese, rice and some eggs.

c.cosolidation(2')

- Consolidates all the lesson: Revise the prepositions of time.

?Who can make up 3 sentences by using prepositions: at/ before/ between.
 d.Home work (2')

- Do Ex3+7 (28-29)

- Write 8 sentences by using prepositions of time
- Prepare Unit 5: Getting stared + Listen and read

Date of preparing: 7.10.2012 Date of teaching:11.10.2012 class8C
12.10.2012 class8A,B
12.10.2012 class8D,E

Unit5 : Study habits

Period26: Getting started + Listen and read 
1. The aims of the lesson.

- By the end of the lesson, studenets will be able to understand the dialogue between Jim and
his mom about his study

a.Knowledge:

Vocabularies

(n).report card, pronunciation

(v).improve, be proud of, try one's best
. Grammar.

- Modal: Should
- Reported speech
* Intonation.

Eg: Tim ? Tim ? Are you home ?
What is it, Mom ?

Don't worry. It's excellent. you did very well.
 b. Skills.

- 4 skills, but pay attention to listening and reading skills.
c.attitue:

help Ss love lesson

</div>
(65)<div class='page_container' data-page=65>

a. Teacher: Text book
b,Students: Books and note books

3.proceduce 
* Settling organization the class (1')

Good morning ! Are you fine to day?
Who's absent to day?

a. Check the old lesson/ warm-up (5 ) ’
" Chatting "

T: Asks Ss some questions .

Eg: What subject are you good / bad at ?
What subject do you like best / why ?

How often do you have math / literature / English ?
Ss: Answer the questions

b. The new lesson 
 Teacher's activities Students' activities

Stage

Eg:

- Introduces the new words

? Do you know the meaning of
words ?

- Writes and says the meaning of
words ( by translation, realia, mime,
situation)

- Gets Ss practise the new words

- Guides Ss the intonation of some
sentences.

+Tim ? Tim ? Are you home ?
+What is it, Mom ?

+ Don't worry. It's excellent. you did
very well.

- Reads the first time

- Gets Ss practise the sentences

- Asks Ss to read the statements and
predict they are true or falsse.

* T/ F statements.

a. Tim was out when his mother
called him.

Tim's mother met his teacher at
school.

c. Tim's report is poor

d. Tim need to improve his Spainish

1. New words. (7')

+report card (n). phiếu báo kết quả
+ pronunciation(n). sự phát âm
+improve (v). nâng cao, tiến bộ
+ be proud of (v). tự hào

+ try one's best (v). cố gắng hết søc
- Read and remember

+ Read followingTin chorus(1-2Ts)
+ Read individually

2.T/ F statements prediction (10')
- Listen

-PractisefollowingTinchorus(1-2 Ts)

- Discuss in groups
- Compare or share

-Read the dialogue again and check
their prediction

* Answers.

St Guess Answer Correction
a.

b.
c.
d.

F
T
F
F

-Tim was at

home

</div>
(66)<div class='page_container' data-page=66>

Eg:

grammar

e. Tim promised to try his best in
learning Spainish.

?Which statements are true ?
?Which statements are false ?
?How do you correct them ?
- Checks and remarks

- Lets Ss read the dialogue again
- Asks Ss to answer the questions
?How do you answer for question a?
b / c / -> e ?

-Listens and remarks

- Introduces over the new structure: "
reported speech ".

T: How do you often have English,
Lan ?

- Lan say I have English 3 times a
week.

-> Lan said that she had English 3
times a week.

e. T

pronunciation

- Correct and copy

3. Comprehention questions (10')
- Read in silent (2')

- Discuss in pairs to answer
* Answers.

a. She's Tim's teacher
b,

She gave Tim's mother his
reportcarrd

c. He worked really hard

d. She said Tim should work harder
on his Spanish pronunciation

e. She gave him a dictionary
- Correct and copy

- Listen and copy

c.cosolidation(10')

- Summarizes the main content: Reading the dialogue for details
- Asks Ss to practise by asking each other the question

Eg: " What subject do you need to improve ?"

d.Home work (2')

- Read and translate the dialogue

- Write the way to improve the subject that you are not good at.
- Prepare Unit 4: Speak + Listen

Date of preparing: 8.10.2012 Date of teaching:13.10.2012 class8B,C
14.10.2012 class8D,E,A

</div>
(67)<div class='page_container' data-page=67>

1. The aims of the lesson.

- By the end of the lesson, studenets will be able to talk about their study habits and to listen
for specific information to fill in a report card

a.Knowledge:

. Vocabularies

(n). behavior, participant, co-operation, attendance
(adj). satisfactory. unsatisfactory

(v). appreciate
. Grammar.
- Modal: Should
- Simple past tense
* Intonation.

Eg: - When do you do your home work ?
- Who helps you with your home work ?

- What do you do to improve your English ?...
b. Skills.

- 4 skills, but pay attention to listening and speaking skills.
c.attitue:

help Ss love lesson

2. Preparation.

a. Teacher: Text book, poster
b.Students: Books and note books
3.proceduce

* Settling organization the class (1')

Good morning ! How are you to day?
Who's absent to day?

a. Check the old lesson/ warm-up (5’) 
" Brainstorming"

T: Asks Ss to write their ideas on the black board

- read English story
? How to improve your English ?

Ss: Write out their ideas

b. The new lesson 
 Teacher's activities Students' activities

Stage

- Introduces the new words

? Do you know the meaning of
words ?

- Writes and says the meaning of
words (by translation, realia, mime,
situation)

- Gets Ss practise the new words

1. New words. (5')
+ behavior (n). thái độ

+ participant (n). sự tham gia

+ co-operation (n). sự hợp tác xd bài
+ attendance (n). sự có mặt

+ satisfactory (adj). hài lòng
+ unsatisfactory (adj). không hài
lßng

</div>
(68)<div class='page_container' data-page=68>

Eg:

- Asks ss to look at Nga's report and
predict the missing information and
then compare with their partners.
- Gets Ss to listen to the tape and
check their prediction

- Calls on some Ss to write their
answers

- Remarks and corrects
- Asks Ss some questions
a. Who are Nga's parents ?
b,

What's Nga's teacher's name ?

c. What subject was reported ? For
what term ?

d. What are the comments ?

e. What does S stand for ? What's
about A-B-C-D-F-U ?

? How do you answer the
questions ?

- Calls on some ss to check

- Asks Ss to work on their own to
answer the questions (48)

- Then asks them to ask their
partners questions and talk notes of
the answers.

- Guides Ss can use the structure to
talk.

S1 said he did his home work after
dinner

S2 said her parents helped her with

her home work

- Read and remember

+ Read followingTin chorus(1-2Ts)
+ Read individually (2-3 Ss)

2.Prediction and listening (7')
- Look at and discuss in pairs
+ Days present (1): 87

+ Days absent (2): 5

+ Behavior-participant (3): S
+ Listening (4): C

+ Speaking (5): A
+ Reading (6): A
+ Writing (7): B

+Teacher's signature (8): Miss Lien
- Correct and copy

* Comprehention questions (10')
- Listen and answer

* Answers.

a. Mr.Lam and Mrs.Linh
b,

Miss Lien
c. English

d. Speaking English quite well.
However she does need to improve
her listening skill

e. + S stands for satisfactory
+ F for fail

+ U for un satisfactory
+ A for excellent
+ B for good
+ C for fair
+ D for poor
- Correct and copy

3. Answer the questions (13')
- Work individually (2')

- Work in groups (4-5 Ss)

Questions you your

partner
1. When do you do

your home work ?
2. Who helps you

with your home
work ?

</div>
(69)<div class='page_container' data-page=69>

...

- Moves around the class and helps
Ss

- Remarks and corrects

History ?...

4. Which subject
do you need to
improve ?

5. What do you do
to improve your
English ?

- Correct the mistakes

c.cosolidation(2')

- Summarizes the main content: Listen for specific information to complete the dialogue
d.Home work (2')

- Write some thing about your partners' study habits
- Do Ex1+4 ( 32-34 )

- Prepare Unit 4: Read

Date of preparing: 14.10.2012 Date of teaching:17.10.2012 class8B,C
18.10.2012 class8D,A
19.10.2012 class8E

Unit5 : Study habits

Period28: Read
1. The aims of the lesson.

- By the end of the lesson, students will be able to®undrstand the text and get specific
information.

a.Knowledge:

. Vocabularies
(n). mother tongue, revision

(v). under line, highlight, come across, stick, make alist, in order to
. Grammar.

- Simple present tense
* Intonation.

Eg: - Language learners learn words in differents ways. Some learners make alist and put in to
the meanings of new words in their mother tongue,...

b. Skills.

- 4 skills, but pay attention to reading skill.
c.attitue:

help Ss love lesson

</div>
(70)<div class='page_container' data-page=70>

a. Teacher: Text book,cards
b.Students: Books and note books

3.proceduce

* Settling organization the class (1')

Good morning ! Are you fine to day?
Who's absent to day?

a. Check the old lesson/ warm-up (5 ) ’
" Chatting"

T: Asings some questions.

Eg: ? Do you like learning English ?

How many words do you try to learn a day ?
What do you do when you read a new word ?
How do you learn/ remember new words ?
Ss: Answer the questions.

b. The new lesson 
 Teacher's activities Students' activities

Stage

Eg:

- Introduces the new words

? Do you know the meaning of
words ?

- Writes and says the meaning of
words (by: mime, example,
synonym)

- Gets Ss practise the new words
- Guides ss the intonation of
sentences.

+ Language learners learn words in
differents ways. Some learners make
alist and put in to the meanings of
new words in their mother

tongue,...

- read the first time and gets Ss to
practise

- Asks Ss to work in pairs to make a
list of the ways how a language
learner can learn new words.
ways language learners
learn new words

1. New words. (5')

+ mother tongue (n). tiếng mẹ đẻ
+ revision (n). sự ôn luyện

+ under line (v). gạch đầu dòng
+ highlight (v). làm nổi bật
+ come across (v). gặp phải
+ stick (v). gắn, dán

+ make alist (v). liệt kê
+ in order to (v). để
- Read and remember

+ Read followingTin chorus(1-2Ts)
+ Read individually (2-3 Ss)

- Listen to T

- Practise following T in chorus (
some times )

"Brainstorming"
* Answers.

1. Learn by heart

2. Translate into mother tongue
3. Write each word on one piece of
paper and put it into the pocket to
learn whenever.

</div>
(71)<div class='page_container' data-page=71>

- Calls on some Ss to write their
answers

- Remars and corrects
- Lets Ss read the text again

- Asks Ss to decide which are true/
falsse ?

?Which statements are true/falsse ?
?How can you correct the falsse
statements ?

- Checks, remarks and corrects

- Has Ss work in pairs to answer the
questions (50)

?How do you answer the question
a ? b? -> f ?

- Calls on some pairs to check

- Listens, remarks and corrects

c.cosolidation(3')

- Summarizes the main content: Read
the text for details

- Gets Ss to read the text

answers

- Correct and copy
- Read carefully again

2. True/ false statements. (7')
- Discuss in groups

St Answers Corrections
a.

b.
c.
d.

F
T
F
T

-somelanguage
learners...

-Manylearners don't
try to learn

- Correct and copy

3.Comprehention questions.(12')
- Practise in pairs( S1 asks, S2
answers)

* Answers.

a. No, they learn words in different
ways

Because they help them to remember
the use of new words

c. They write example, put the words
and their meanings on stickers,
under line or high light them

d. They may think they can't do so.
instead, they learn only important
words

e. Revision is necessary in learning
words.

f. Learners should try different ways
of learning words to find out what is
the best.

- Correct and copy
- Listen and remember
-Read in chorus last time

</div>
(72)<div class='page_container' data-page=72>

- Write the way of learning words that you think are the best
for you.

- Do Ex3+6 ( 33-35 )
- Prepare Unit 4: write

---

Date of preparing: 21.10.2012 Date of teaching:27.10.2012 class8a
26.10.2012 class8b

25.10.2012 class8c

Unit5 : Study habits
Period28: Read
1. The aims of the lesson.

- By the end of the lesson, students will be able to®undrstand the text and get specific
information.

a.Knowledge:

. Vocabularies
(n). mother tongue, revision

(v). under line, highlight, come across, stick, make alist, in order to
. Grammar.

- Simple present tense
* Intonation.

Eg: - Language learners learn words in differents ways. Some learners make alist and put in to
the meanings of new words in their mother tongue,...

b. Skills.

- 4 skills, but pay attention to reading skill.
c.attitue:

help Ss love lesson

2. Preparation.

a. Teacher: Text book,cards
b.Students: Books and note books

3.proceduce

* Settling organization the class (1')

Good morning ! Are you fine to day?
Who's absent to day?

a. Check the old lesson/ warm-up (5 ) ’
" Chatting"

T: Asings some questions.

Eg: ? Do you like learning English ?

</div>
(73)<div class='page_container' data-page=73>

How do you learn/ remember new words ?
Ss: Answer the questions.

b. The new lesson 
 Teacher's activities Students' activities

Stage

Eg:

- Introduces the new words

? Do you know the meaning of
words ?

- Writes and says the meaning of
words (by: mime, example,
synonym)

- Gets Ss practise the new words
- Guides ss the intonation of
sentences.

+ Language learners learn words in
differents ways. Some learners make
alist and put in to the meanings of
new words in their mother

tongue,...

- read the first time and gets Ss to
practise

- Asks Ss to work in pairs to make a
list of the ways how a language
learner can learn new words.

ways language learners
learn new words

- Calls on some Ss to write their
answers

- Remars and corrects
- Lets Ss read the text again

- Asks Ss to decide which are true/
falsse ?

?Which statements are true/falsse ?
?How can you correct the falsse
statements ?

- Checks, remarks and corrects

1. New words. (5')

+ mother tongue (n). tiếng mẹ đẻ
+ revision (n). sự ụn luyn

+ under line (v). gạch đầu dòng
+ highlight (v). làm nổi bật
+ come across (v). gặp phải
+ stick (v). gắn, dán

+ make alist (v). lit kờ
+ in order to (v). để

- Read and remember

+ Read followingTin chorus(1-2Ts)
+ Read individually (2-3 Ss)

- Listen to T

- Practise following T in chorus (
some times )

"Brainstorming"
* Answers.

1. Learn by heart

2. Translate into mother tongue
3. Write each word on one piece of
paper and put it into the pocket to
learn whenever.

4. Learn through example sentences
5. write it on a small piece of paper
and stick where ever in the house.
- Discuss in groups to find out the
answers

- Correct and copy
- Read carefully again

2. True/ false statements. (7')

- Discuss in groups

St Answers Corrections
a.

b.
c.
d.

F
T
F
T

-somelanguage
learners...

</div>
(74)<div class='page_container' data-page=74>

- Has Ss work in pairs to answer the
questions (50)

?How do you answer the question
a ? b? -> f ?

- Calls on some pairs to check

- Listens, remarks and corrects

c.cosolidation(3')

- Summarizes the main content: Read
the text for details

- Gets Ss to read the text

- Correct and copy

3.Comprehention questions.(12')
- Practise in pairs( S1 asks, S2
answers)

* Answers.

a. No, they learn words in different
ways

Because they help them to remember
the use of new words

c. They write example, put the words
and their meanings on stickers,
under line or high light them

d. They may think they can't do so.
instead, they learn only important
words

e. Revision is necessary in learning
words.

f. Learners should try different ways
of learning words to find out what is
the best.

- Correct and copy
- Listen and remember
-Read in chorus last time

d.Home work (2')

- Write the way of learning words that you think are the best
for you.

- Do Ex3+6 ( 33-35 )
- Prepare Unit 4: write

---

Date of preparing: 21.10.2012 Date of teaching:27.10.2012 class8a
26.10.2012 class8b

25.10.2012 class8c

</div>
(75)<div class='page_container' data-page=75>

Period29: Read
1. The aims of the lesson.

- By the end of the lesson, students will be able to®undrstand the text and get specific
information.

a.Knowledge:

. Vocabularies
(n). mother tongue, revision

(v). under line, highlight, come across, stick, make alist, in order to
. Grammar.

- Simple present tense
* Intonation.

Eg: - Language learners learn words in differents ways. Some learners make alist and put in to
the meanings of new words in their mother tongue,...

b. Skills.

- 4 skills, but pay attention to reading skill.
c.attitue:

help Ss love lesson

2. Preparation.

a. Teacher: Text book,cards
b.Students: Books and note books

3.proceduce

* Settling organization the class (1')

Good morning ! Are you fine to day?
Who's absent to day?

a. Check the old lesson/ warm-up (5 ) ’
" Chatting"

T: Asings some questions.

Eg: ? Do you like learning English ?

How many words do you try to learn a day ?
What do you do when you read a new word ?
How do you learn/ remember new words ?
Ss: Answer the questions.

b. The new lesson 
 Teacher's activities Students' activities

Stage

- Introduces the new words

? Do you know the meaning of
words ?

- Writes and says the meaning of
words (by: mime, example,
synonym)

1. New words. (5')

+ mother tongue (n). tiếng mẹ đẻ
+ revision (n). sự ơn luyện

+ under line (v). g¹ch đầu dòng
+ highlight (v). làm nổi bật
+ come across (v). gặp phải
+ stick (v). gắn, dán

</div>
(76)<div class='page_container' data-page=76>

Eg:

- Gets Ss practise the new words
- Guides ss the intonation of
sentences.

+ Language learners learn words in
differents ways. Some learners make
alist and put in to the meanings of

new words in their mother

tongue,...

- read the first time and gets Ss to
practise

- Asks Ss to work in pairs to make a
list of the ways how a language
learner can learn new words.
ways language learners
learn new words

- Calls on some Ss to write their
answers

- Remars and corrects
- Lets Ss read the text again

- Asks Ss to decide which are true/
falsse ?

?Which statements are true/falsse ?
?How can you correct the falsse
statements ?

- Checks, remarks and corrects

- Has Ss work in pairs to answer the
questions (50)

?How do you answer the question
a ? b? -> f ?

- Read and remember

+ Read followingTin chorus(1-2Ts)
+ Read individually (2-3 Ss)

- Listen to T

- Practise following T in chorus (
some times )

"Brainstorming"
* Answers.

1. Learn by heart

2. Translate into mother tongue
3. Write each word on one piece of
paper and put it into the pocket to
learn whenever.

4. Learn through example sentences
5. write it on a small piece of paper
and stick where ever in the house.
- Discuss in groups to find out the
answers

- Correct and copy
- Read carefully again

2. True/ false statements. (7')
- Discuss in groups

St Answers Corrections
a.

b.
c.
d.

F
T
F
T

-somelanguage
learners...

-Manylearners don't
try to learn

- Correct and copy

3.Comprehention questions.(12')
- Practise in pairs( S1 asks, S2
answers)

* Answers.

a. No, they learn words in different
ways

Because they help them to remember
the use of new words

</div>
(77)<div class='page_container' data-page=77>

- Calls on some pairs to check

- Listens, remarks and corrects

c.cosolidation(3')

- Summarizes the main content: Read
the text for details

- Gets Ss to read the text

under line or high light them

d. They may think they can't do so.
instead, they learn only important
words

e. Revision is necessary in learning
words.

f. Learners should try different ways
of learning words to find out what is
the best.

- Correct and copy
- Listen and remember
-Read in chorus last time

d.Home work (2')

- Write the way of learning words that you think are the best
for you.

- Do Ex3+6 ( 33-35 )
- Prepare Unit 4: write

---

Date of preparing: 21.10.2012 Date of teaching:27.10.2012 class8a
26.10.2012 class8b

25.10.2012 class8c

Unit5 : Study habits
Period28: Read
1. The aims of the lesson.

- By the end of the lesson, students will be able to®undrstand the text and get specific
information.

a.Knowledge:

. Vocabularies
(n). mother tongue, revision

(v). under line, highlight, come across, stick, make alist, in order to
. Grammar.

- Simple present tense
* Intonation.

Eg: - Language learners learn words in differents ways. Some learners make alist and put in to
the meanings of new words in their mother tongue,...

</div>
(78)<div class='page_container' data-page=78>

- 4 skills, but pay attention to reading skill.
c.attitue:

help Ss love lesson

2. Preparation.

a. Teacher: Text book,cards
b.Students: Books and note books

3.proceduce

* Settling organization the class (1')

Good morning ! Are you fine to day?
Who's absent to day?

a. Check the old lesson/ warm-up (5 ) ’
" Chatting"

T: Asings some questions.

Eg: ? Do you like learning English ?

How many words do you try to learn a day ?
What do you do when you read a new word ?
How do you learn/ remember new words ?
Ss: Answer the questions.

b. The new lesson 
 Teacher's activities Students' activities

Stage

Eg:

- Introduces the new words

? Do you know the meaning of

words ?

- Writes and says the meaning of
words (by: mime, example,
synonym)

- Gets Ss practise the new words
- Guides ss the intonation of
sentences.

+ Language learners learn words in
differents ways. Some learners make
alist and put in to the meanings of
new words in their mother

tongue,...

- read the first time and gets Ss to
practise

- Asks Ss to work in pairs to make a
list of the ways how a language

1. New words. (5')

+ mother tongue (n). tiếng mẹ đẻ
+ revision (n). sự ôn luyện

+ under line (v). gạch đầu dòng
+ highlight (v). làm nổi bật

+ come across (v). gặp phải
+ stick (v). gắn, dán

+ make alist (v). liệt kê
+ in order to (v). để
- Read and remember

+ Read followingTin chorus(1-2Ts)
+ Read individually (2-3 Ss)

- Listen to T

- Practise following T in chorus (
some times )

"Brainstorming"
* Answers.

1. Learn by heart

</div>
(79)<div class='page_container' data-page=79>

learner can learn new words.
ways language learners
learn new words

- Calls on some Ss to write their
answers

- Remars and corrects

- Lets Ss read the text again

- Asks Ss to decide which are true/
falsse ?

?Which statements are true/falsse ?
?How can you correct the falsse
statements ?

- Checks, remarks and corrects

- Has Ss work in pairs to answer the
questions (50)

?How do you answer the question
a ? b? -> f ?

- Calls on some pairs to check

- Listens, remarks and corrects

c.cosolidation(3')

- Summarizes the main content: Read
the text for details

4. Learn through example sentences
5. write it on a small piece of paper
and stick where ever in the house.
- Discuss in groups to find out the

answers

- Correct and copy
- Read carefully again

2. True/ false statements. (7')
- Discuss in groups

St Answers Corrections
a.

b.
c.
d.

F
T
F
T

-somelanguage
learners...

-Manylearners don't
try to learn

- Correct and copy

3.Comprehention questions.(12')
- Practise in pairs( S1 asks, S2

answers)

* Answers.

a. No, they learn words in different
ways

Because they help them to remember
the use of new words

c. They write example, put the words
and their meanings on stickers,
under line or high light them

d. They may think they can't do so.
instead, they learn only important
words

e. Revision is necessary in learning
words.

f. Learners should try different ways
of learning words to find out what is
the best.

</div>
(80)<div class='page_container' data-page=80>

- Gets Ss to read the text

d.Home work (2')

- Write the way of learning words that you think are the best
for you.

- Do Ex3+6 ( 33-35 )
- Prepare Unit 4: write

---

Date of preparing: 21.10.2012 Date of teaching:27.10.2012 class8a
26.10.2012 class8b

25.10.2012 class8c

Unit5 : Study habits
Period28: Read
1. The aims of the lesson.

- By the end of the lesson, students will be able to®undrstand the text and get specific
information.

a.Knowledge:

. Vocabularies
(n). mother tongue, revision

(v). under line, highlight, come across, stick, make alist, in order to

. Grammar.

- Simple present tense
* Intonation.

Eg: - Language learners learn words in differents ways. Some learners make alist and put in to
the meanings of new words in their mother tongue,...

b. Skills.

- 4 skills, but pay attention to reading skill.
c.attitue:

help Ss love lesson

2. Preparation.

a. Teacher: Text book,cards
b.Students: Books and note books

3.proceduce

* Settling organization the class (1')

Good morning ! Are you fine to day?
Who's absent to day?

a. Check the old lesson/ warm-up (5 ) ’
" Chatting"

</div>
(81)<div class='page_container' data-page=81>

Eg: ? Do you like learning English ?

How many words do you try to learn a day ?
What do you do when you read a new word ?
How do you learn/ remember new words ?
Ss: Answer the questions.

b. The new lesson 
 Teacher's activities Students' activities

Stage

Eg:

- Introduces the new words

? Do you know the meaning of
words ?

- Writes and says the meaning of
words (by: mime, example,
synonym)

- Gets Ss practise the new words
- Guides ss the intonation of
sentences.

+ Language learners learn words in
differents ways. Some learners make
alist and put in to the meanings of
new words in their mother

tongue,...

- read the first time and gets Ss to
practise

- Asks Ss to work in pairs to make a
list of the ways how a language
learner can learn new words.
ways language learners
learn new words

- Calls on some Ss to write their
answers

- Remars and corrects
- Lets Ss read the text again

- Asks Ss to decide which are true/
falsse ?

?Which statements are true/falsse ?
?How can you correct the falsse
statements ?

1. New words. (5')

+ mother tongue (n). tiếng mẹ đẻ
+ revision (n). sự ôn luyện

+ under line (v). gạch đầu dòng
+ highlight (v). làm nổi bật
+ come across (v). gặp phải
+ stick (v). gắn, dán

+ make alist (v). liệt kê
+ in order to (v). để
- Read and remember

+ Read followingTin chorus(1-2Ts)
+ Read individually (2-3 Ss)

- Listen to T

- Practise following T in chorus (
some times )

"Brainstorming"
* Answers.

1. Learn by heart

2. Translate into mother tongue
3. Write each word on one piece of
paper and put it into the pocket to
learn whenever.

4. Learn through example sentences
5. write it on a small piece of paper
and stick where ever in the house.
- Discuss in groups to find out the
answers

- Correct and copy
- Read carefully again

2. True/ false statements. (7')
- Discuss in groups

St Answers Corrections
a.

b.
F
T

</div>
(82)<div class='page_container' data-page=82>

- Checks, remarks and corrects

- Has Ss work in pairs to answer the
questions (50)

?How do you answer the question
a ? b? -> f ?

- Calls on some pairs to check

- Listens, remarks and corrects

c.cosolidation(3')

- Summarizes the main content: Read
the text for details

- Gets Ss to read the text

c.
d.

F
T

-Manylearners don't
try to learn

- Correct and copy

3.Comprehention questions.(12')
- Practise in pairs( S1 asks, S2
answers)

* Answers.

a. No, they learn words in different
ways

Because they help them to remember
the use of new words

c. They write example, put the words
and their meanings on stickers,
under line or high light them

d. They may think they can't do so.
instead, they learn only important
words

e. Revision is necessary in learning
words.

f. Learners should try different ways
of learning words to find out what is
the best.

- Correct and copy
- Listen and remember
-Read in chorus last time

d.Home work (2')

- Write the way of learning words that you think are the best

for you.

- Do Ex3+6 ( 33-35 )
- Prepare Unit 4: write

---

Date of preparing: 21.10.2012 Date of teaching:27.10.2012 class8a
26.10.2012 class8b

</div>
(83)<div class='page_container' data-page=83>

Unit5 : Study habits
Period28: Read
1. The aims of the lesson.

- By the end of the lesson, students will be able to®undrstand the text and get specific
information.

a.Knowledge:

. Vocabularies
(n). mother tongue, revision

(v). under line, highlight, come across, stick, make alist, in order to
. Grammar.

- Simple present tense
* Intonation.

Eg: - Language learners learn words in differents ways. Some learners make alist and put in to

the meanings of new words in their mother tongue,...

b. Skills.

- 4 skills, but pay attention to reading skill.
c.attitue:

help Ss love lesson
2. Preparation.

a. Teacher: Text book,cards
b.Students: Books and note books

3.proceduce

* Settling organization the class (1')

Good morning ! Are you fine to day?
Who's absent to day?

a. Check the old lesson/ warm-up (5’) 
" Chatting"

T: Asings some questions.

Eg: ? Do you like learning English ?

How many words do you try to learn a day ?
What do you do when you read a new word ?
Ss: Answer the questions.

b. The new lesson 
 Teacher's activities Students' activities

Stage

- Introduces the new words

? Do you know the meaning of
words ?

- Writes and says the meaning of
words (by: mime, example,

1. New words. (5')

+ mother tongue (n). tiếng mẹ đẻ
+ revision (n). sự ôn luyện

</div>
(84)<div class='page_container' data-page=84>

Eg:

synonym)

- Gets Ss practise the new words
- Guides ss the intonation of
sentences.

+ Language learners learn words in
differents ways. Some learners make
alist and put in to the meanings of
new words in their mother

tongue,...

- read the first time and gets Ss to
practise

- Asks Ss to work in pairs to make a
list of the ways how a language
learner can learn new words.
ways language learners
learn new words

- Calls on some Ss to write their
answers

- Remars and corrects
- Lets Ss read the text again

- Asks Ss to decide which are true/
falsse ?

?Which statements are true/falsse ?

?How can you correct the falsse
statements ?

- Checks, remarks and correct

+ Read followingTin chorus(1-2Ts)
+ Read individually (2-3 Ss)

- Listen to T

- Practise following T in chorus (
some times )

"Brainstorming"
* Answers.

1. Learn by heart

2. Translate into mother tongue
3. Write each word on one piece of
paper and put it into the pocket to
learn whenever.

4. Learn through example sentences
5. write it on a small piece of paper
and stick where ever in the house.
- Discuss in groups to find out the
answers

- Correct and copy

- Read carefully again

2. True/ false statements. (7')
- Discuss in groups

St Answers Corrections
a.

b.
c.
d.

F
T
F
T

-somelanguage
learners...

-Manylearners don't
try to learn

- Correct and copy

</div>
(85)<div class='page_container' data-page=85>

c.cosolidation(3')

- Summarizes the main content: Read the text for details
- Gets Ss to read the text

d.Home work (2')

- Write the way of learning words that you think are the best
for you.

- Do Ex3+6 ( 33-34 )
- Prepare Unit 4:Read 2

---

Date of preparing: 21.10.2012 Date of teaching:27.10.2012 class8a
26.10.2012 class8b

25.10.2012 class8c

Unit5 : Study habits
Period29: Read(conti)

1. The aims of the lesson.

- By the end of the lesson, students will be able to®undrstand the text and get specific
information.

a.Knowledge:

. Vocabularies

stick, make alist, in order to
. Grammar.

- Simple present tense
b. Skills.

- 4 skills, but pay attention to reading skill.
c.attitue:

help Ss love lesson

2. Preparation.

a. Teacher: Text book,cards
b.Students: Books and note books
3.proceduce

* Settling organization the class (1')

Good morning ! Are you fine to day?
Who's absent to day?

a. Check the old lesson/ warm-up (5’) 
" Chatting"

T: Asings some questions.

Eg: ? Do you like learning English ?

</div>
(86)<div class='page_container' data-page=86>

Ss: Answer the questions.

b. The new lesson 
 Teacher's activities Students' activities

Stage

Eg:

- Introduces the new words

? Do you know the meaning of
words ?

- Writes and says the meaning of
words (by: mime, example,
synonym)

- Gets Ss practise the new words
- Guides ss the intonation of
sentences.

+ Language learners learn words in
differents ways. Some learners make
alist and put in to the meanings of
new words in their mother

tongue,...

- read the first time and gets Ss to
practise

- Asks Ss to work in pairs to make a
list of the ways how a language
learner can learn new words.
ways language learners
learn new words

- Calls on some Ss to write their
answers

- Remars and corrects

- Has Ss work in pairs to answer the
questions (50)

?How do you answer the question
a ? b? -> f ?

1. New words. (4')
+ stick (v). gắn, dán
+ make alist (v). liệt kê
+ in order to (v). để
- Read and remember

+ Read followingTin chorus(1-2Ts)
+ Read individually (2-3 Ss)

- Listen to T

- Practise following T in chorus (
some times )

"Brainstorming"(8’)
* Answers.

1. Learn by heart

2. Translate into mother tongue
3. Write each word on one piece of
paper and put it into the pocket to
learn whenever.

4. Learn through example sentences
5. write it on a small piece of paper
and stick where ever in the house.
- Discuss in groups to find out the
answers

- Correct and copy
- Read carefully again

2.Comprehention questions.(12')
- Practise in pairs( S1 asks, S2
answers)

* Answers.

a. No, they learn words in different
ways

Because they help them to remember
the use of new words

</div>
(87)<div class='page_container' data-page=87>

- Calls on some pairs to check

- Listens, remarks and corrects
* Survey

-Ask Ss to work in groups of 4-5 to
interview one another and tickthe
ways they have to learn new words

Tt Ways of
leaning

words

nga Hoa ….

Make a list
of

words,their

meanings
and learn
them by
heart.
Write
sampl
sentences
with new
words.

- Aks Ss to report about their group.

Eg:”Hoa learn words by making a
list of words,their meaning and
learning them by heart.She also
reads stories in English…….

d. They may think they can't do so.
instead, they learn only important

words

e. Revision is necessary in learning
words.

f. Learners should try different ways
of learning words to find out what is
the best.

- Correct and copy
* Survey(10’)
- work in groups

-Ss to report

c.cosolidation(3')

- Summarizes the main content: Read the text for details
- Gets Ss to read the text

</div>
(88)<div class='page_container' data-page=88>

- Write the way of learning words that you think are the best
for you.

- Do Ex3+6 ( 35 )
- Prepare Unit 4: write

***********************************************************************
Date of preparing: 21.10.2012 Date of teaching:27.10.2012 class8a
26.10.2012 class8b

28.10.2012 class8c

Unit5 : Study habits
Period29: Write
1. The aims of the lesson.

- By the end of the lesson, students will be able to understand and know the format of a
friendly letter and practice writing a letter to a friend

1. Vocabularies

(n). Lunar New Year Festival, result, regards
(adj). enjoyable

(v). celebrate

2. Grammar.

- Simple present / past / future tenses.
b. Skills.

- 4 skills, but pay attention to writing skill.
c.attitue:

help Ss love lesson

2. Preparation. 
a. Teacher: Text book,form letter

b, Students: Books and note books

3.proceduce

* Settling organization the class (1')

Good morning ! How are you to day?
Who's absent to day?

a.Check the old lesson(5’) 
" Chatting"

T: Asings some questionsdealing with writing letters.
Eg: ? Have you ever written to some one ?

To whom do you usually ?

</div>
(89)<div class='page_container' data-page=89>

Ss: Answer the questions.

b. The new lesson 
 Teacher's activities Students' activities

Stage

Eg:

- Introduces the new words

? Do you know the meaning of
words ?

- Writes and says the meaning of
words.

(by: example,explanation,example)
- Gets Ss practise the new words
- Asks Ss to put the parts of the letter
in the correct order depend on the
form letter (51).

- Before, lets Ss guess the correct
order.

?How many parts are there in the
letter ?

What are they ?

How can you put them in the correct
order ?

- Checks, remarks, then corrects.
- Gives out the form of a letter.

(1) Writer's address
Headings (2) The date

(3) Opening: Dear....,
(4) Body of the letter.

(5) Closing.
(6) Signature
- Asks Ss to answer some questions
a. Who wrote the letter?To whom ?
b.What are there in the heading ?
c. What is the main part of the letter?
d. What did Hoa recei a few days
ago ?

e. Is Hoa good at Math ?

f. What subject is Hoa good at ?
g. Where is she going to celebrate

1. New words. (5')

+ Lunar New Year Festival (n-ph).
Lễ hội mừng năm míi

+ result (n). kÕt qu¶

+ regards (n). sù kÝnh träng, kÝnh
th

+ enjoyable (adj). thó vÞ, thÝch thó =
interesting

+ celebrate (v). tỉ chøc
- Read and remember
2.Ordering (10')

- Look at the form letter (51)
- Discuss in groups and guess

- Read the form letter (51) again to
check their order

* Answers.

St Guess Correct order
a.

b.
c.
d.
e.
f.

1(f):writer'saddress
2(c): The date
3(a): Opening
4(d): Body of the
letter

5(b): Closing
6(e): Signature
- Correctand copy

- Discuss in pairs to answer the
questions

* Answer the questions

a. Hoa wrote to Tim, her penpal
b,

Writer's name and the date
c. The body of the letter
d. Her first semester report
e. No, she isn't

</div>
(90)<div class='page_container' data-page=90>

the Lunar new Year Festival ?

- Now you will help Lan to write a
letter to Lan's penpal Donna in San
Francisco,by using the given
information in the box(51)

- Gets Ss to discuss in groups to
complete the letter

* Notes:

+ Sau "Dear" ph¶i dïng dÊu phÈy.

Eg: Dear Lan, ; Dear Mom,....

+ Lời chào cuối th có thể rất đa dạng
và tuỳ vào mức độ trang trọng hay
thân mật.

Eg: + Regards,
+ Best wisshes,
+ With best wishes,

+ With ford / warm regards,
+ With much love,

+ With all my love,
...

- Moves round the class and helps Ss
complete the letter

- Checks, remarks and corrects

3. Writing (20')
- Listen to T

- Discuss and work in groups
* Answers.

15 Thanh Giong st, Ha Noi

June 10 / 2004.

Dear Donna,

- Thanks for your letter. I'm glad to
hear you had an enjoyable Mother's
Day.

- We receied our second semester
report last month. I good grades for
Geography, Physics and math, but
my English and History results were
poor. My teacher advises me to
improve English and History. I think
I have to study harder next school
year.

-In a few weeks, we are going
tocelebrate the Mid Auturm Festival.
That is an Auturm moon Festival in
Viet Nam. This afternoon, I'm going
to Ha Long Bay with my aunt and
uncle by bus and I'm going to stay
there with them until the festival
comes, I'll send you a post card from
there.

-Write soon and tell me all your
news.

Best, Lan.

c.Cosolidation(2')

- Consolidate the mian content: The way to write a personal letter.
1.Heading: writer's addressand the

</div>
(91)<div class='page_container' data-page=91>

2.Opening: Dear...,
3.Body of the letter.

4.Closing: regards / love....
5.Signature.

d.Home work (2')

- Write a letter to your friend to tell him/her about your first
semester report and about your second semester

- Prepare Unit 4:Language focus 1-2
* Guidings:

- Revise the adverbs of manner

- Look at the picture (52) and say what Mr.Hao should do /
? What main content of the lesson ?

********************************************************
Date of preparing: 20.10.2012 Date of teaching:28.10.2012 class8a

29.10.2012 class8b

29.10.2012 class8c

Unit5 : Study habits
Period30: Language focus

1. The aims of the lesson.

- By the end of the lesson, students will be able to use adverbs of manner and modal " Should"
as an advice

a. knowledge: 
. Vocabularies

(n). sore throat

(v). be have, replant, mend
. Grammar.

- Adverbs of manner
- Modal: Should
 b. Skills.

- 4 skills, but pay attention to writing and speaking skills.
 c.attitue:

help Ss love lesson

2. Preparation.

a. Teacher: Text book,picture

</div>
(92)<div class='page_container' data-page=92>

3.proceduce

* Settling organization the class (1')

Good morning ! Are you fine to day?
Who's absent to day?

a.Check the old lesson(5 ) ’
* Question: Asks Ss to repeat the form of a personal letter

Eg: How many parts are there in a personal letter ?
What are they ?

How do you write a letter ?

* Key:There are 5 parts: 1.Heading: writer's addressand the
date

2.Opening: Dear...,
3.Body of the letter.

4.Closing: regards / love....
5.Signature.

* Mark: Listens, remarks and gives mark

b. The new lesson

Teacher's activities Students' activities

Stage

Eg:

- Sets the scence. " use any word
from the game to complete the
following sentence"

Lan has a...(1)... voice and she
usually speaks....(2).... ( soft/ softly)

- Helps Ss distinguish the use of adjs
and advs

- Asks Ss to do Ex1 (52)

?Which adv do you use to fill in 1 ?
2 ? 3 ? 4 ?

1. Adverbs of manner (15')

- Listen

- Copy
* Answers.
1. soft (adj)
2. softly (adv)
* Form

S + V +(a / an) + adj + N
or: S + to be + adj

S + V + adv
* Use:

+ Adj modifies the noun after it
+ Adv modifies the verb of the
sentences

* Complete the dialogues.

- work in pairs, use the advs in the
box to fill in the dialogue

* Answers.

a. (o)- well

</div>
(93)<div class='page_container' data-page=93>

Eg;

- Gets Ss to practise the dialogues
- Calls on some pairs to check
- Listens and remarks

- Asks Ss to look at Mr.Hao's house
and answer the questions

a. Is Mr.Hao's house new ?
b,

Is the wall discolored ?
c. How is the door ?

d. is there grass in his garden ?
e. Should Mr.Hao do ?

- Gives the explanation of the modal
"should"

- Gives ss the question; What should
he do with his house ?

- Gets ss to practise in pairs
- Calls on some pairs to check

- Listens, remarks and gives mark

- Sets the scence." Last period you
knew Tim's mother and Tim's teacher
are talking about his study. Now
you'll remember again and complete
the dialogue between them."
( should, of,lot, good, course, a,
harder, can, pronunciation,
dictionary)

*Tim'smotherand Miss jackson.
Miss Jackson:..(1)... you give

c. (2)- fast
d. (3)- badly
e. (4)- softly
- Correct the mistakes

2. What should Mr.Hao do ? (17')
- Look at the picture (52), then
answer the questions.

* Answers.
a. No, it isn't
b,

Yes, it is
c. It is broken

d. Yes, there is a lot of grass in his
garden

e. Yes, she should
* Form.

S + should + V-infinitive

* Use: Đa ra lời khuyên nên ( làm gì
)

- Use the verbs in the box to advise
Mr.Hao what to do.

* Answers.

a. Mr,Hao should repair the roof
b,He should paint the house
cut the grass
replant the tree
mend the door

- Listen to T

- Discuss in groups
- Complete the dialogue
* Answers.

(1)- can / (6)- lot
(2)- dictionary / (7)- good

(3)- of / (8)- should
(4)- course / (9)- harder

(5)- a / (10)- pronunciation

</div>
(94)<div class='page_container' data-page=94>

Tim this...(2)...
Tim's mother: Yes...(3)../..(4)...
Thank...(5)../..(6)...
Miss Jackson: His grades
are...(7)...But he..(8)...
word....(9)... on his
Spanish....(10)....

- Then Tim and his mother are at
home and talking about what Miss
Jackson said.

( dictionary, should, you, my, to, you,
improve, your, pronunciation,
harder )

*Tim and Tim's mother.
Tim's mother: Miss Jackson
asked me...(1)..give...(2)..
this...(3)...

Tim: Yes, I know

Tim's mother: Miss Jackson
said..(4)../...(5)..work..(6)..

on..(7)..Spanish..(8)...
Tim: I'll try to....(9)... best
to..(10)....it

?How do you complete the dialogues
- Remarks and corrects

- Asks Ss some questions to check
their understanding

?1. What did Miss Jackson say to
Tim's mother ?

2. What did Tim's mother report it to
Tim ?

- Gives out the form of the direct
command. Then talks to Ss some
rules when change a direct speech
into an indirect speech.

- Makes up the example

- Work in groups to complete the
dialogue

* Answers.

(1)- to / (6)- harder
(2)- you / (7)- your

(3)- dictionary / (8)- pronunciation
(4)- you / (9)- my

(5)- should / (10)- improve

- Correct the mistakes
- Copy

1. Repored speech. (15')
- Answer the questions.
* Answers.

1"Can you give me this
dictionary ?"

2." Miss Jackson asked me to give
you this dictionary."

* Form: câu mệnh lệnh gián tiÕp.
S + asked + some one + to-inf.
told

ordered
command
...

- Khi chuyển từ câu trực tiếp sang
câu gián tiếp cần có những thay đổi
sau;

a. Thay đổi đại từ nhân xng, đại từ
phản thân, đại từ và tính từ sở hữu.
Direct Indirect

</div>
(95)<div class='page_container' data-page=95>

He said,"I don't understand this
sentence".

-> He said he didn't understand that
sentence".

?3.What elsse did Miss Jackson say?
4.What did Tim's mother reportit to
Tim?

- Asks Ss to do Ex3 (53)

?How do you change the direct
speech into indirect speech a ? b ?
c ? d ?

- Checks, remarks then corrects

-Ngôi thứ hai -Đổi thành cùng
ngôi với tân ngữ
của mệnh đề chính
-Ngơi thứ ba -Giữ nguyên không
thay đổi

Đổi thì của động từ

Direct Indirect
-Simple present -Simple past
-Present progressive-Past rogressive
-Future -Future in the
past

...

c. Nh÷ng tõ chØ nh÷ng gì ở gần
chuyển thành những từ chỉ những gì
ở xa

Direct Indirect
- This - That
-These - Those
- Here - There
- Now - Then
- Today - That day
- To night - That night
- Tomorrow - The next day

The following day
-Yesterday -The day before
- Last night - The night before.
3. "Tim should work harder on his
Spanish pronunciation".

4. "Miss Jackson said you should
work harder on your Spanish
pronunciation."

2. Practice (13')
* Drill 1.

- Work in pairs to complete the
sentences

* Answers.

a. Miss Jackson asked me to wait for
her out side her office

</div>
(96)<div class='page_container' data-page=96>

- Gets Ss to do Ex 4 (53)

?How do you practise the sentence
a ? b ? -> e ?

- Calls on some Ss to check their
answers

- Remarks then correct their
mistakes

c.cosolidation( 2')

- Summarizes the main content:
Further practice adverbs of manner
and the modal "should".

d. Miss Jackson told me to meet her
next week.

- Correct and copy
* Drill 2.

a. Miss Jackson said you should
spend more time on Spanish
pronunciation

Miss Jackson said you should

practice speaking Spanish

pronunciation every day.

c. Miss Jackson said you should
listen to Spanish pronunciation on
T.V

d. Miss Jackson said you should
practice reading aloud passage in
Spanish

e. Miss Jackson said you should use
this dictionary to find out how to
pronunce Spanish words.

- Corrct the mistakes
- Copy

-Correct and copy
- Listen and remember

d.Home work (2')

- Write 5 sentences using: Should + V(inf) and the following cues

a. do morning exercise / regulary
b,study hard

c. get up early

d. ride bike / carefully

</div>
(97)<div class='page_container' data-page=97>

* Guidings:

- Read the examples (53) then recognize the way of changing the
derect speech into inderect speech

? How to practise the sentences ?

---

Date of preparing: 27.10.2012 Date of teaching:3.11.2012 class8a
2.11.2012 class8b

1.11.2012 class8c

Unit6 : The yuong pioneers club
Period31: Getting started + Listen and read
1. The aims of the lesson.

- By the end of the lesson, students will be able to understand the dialogue for details
a.Knowledge:

Vocabularies

(n). application form, out door activities
(v).enroll

Grammar.

- Regund and modal: May
* Intonation:

Eg: - May I help you ?

- I like drawing and out door activities

- Let me get an application form and we can fill it out
 b. Skills.

- 4 skills, but pay attention to listeing and reading skills.
c.attitue:

help Ss love lesson

2. Preparation.

a. Teacher: Text book
b.Students: Books and note books

3.proceduce 
* Settling organization the class (1')

Good morning ! How are you to day?
Who's absent to day?

</div>
(98)<div class='page_container' data-page=98>

" Chatting"

T: Asings some questions about their activities and their summer holidays.
Eg: What do you usually do on your summer holiday ?

Are you remember of the Young Pioneers and Yuoth Organization ?
Are there any activity programs for the summer ?

Do you take part in them ?

What activity do you like most ?
...

Ss: Answer the questions.

b. The new lesson

Teacher's activities Students' activities
Stage

Eg:

- Introduces the new words

? Do you know the meaning of
words ?

- Writes and says the meaning of
words.

(by: transla tion, visual, example)

- Gets Ss practise the new words
- Sets the scence. "Nga is a student in
grade eight. She wants to enroll in

the activities for the summer. Now
you'll hear the conversation between
Nga and secrectary, then fill the
mising words to complete the
sentences".

+ Good...(1)... I'm enrolling...(2)..
the activities for this ...(3)...

+ Pham...(4)... Nga

+ April 2...(5).../ 19....(6)....

+ I like drawing and...(7)... activities.
- Reads the dialogue 2 times and
asks ss to close their books

- Gets Ss to listen the dialogue last
time

1. New words. (5')

+ application form (n).đơn xin
tham gia
+ out door activities(n). các hoạt
động ngoài trời
+ enroll(v). đăng kí học, tham gia
+ fill out(v). điền thơng tin

- Read and remember

+Read followingT in chorus(1-2Ts)
+ Read individualy (3-4 Ss)

Ex: Fill in the mising words (8')
- Listen to T (2Ts)(close the books)
- Discuss in groups then share
- Listen to T last time to check
* Answers.

(1). morning
(2). for
(3). summer
(4). Mai
(5). 2
(6). 89
(7). out door

</div>
(99)<div class='page_container' data-page=99>

Eg:

- Checks and remarks

- Guides Ss the intonation of some
sentences

+ May I help you ?

+ I like drawing and out door
activities

+ Let me get an application form and
we can fill it out

- Reads first time, then lets ss read
following in chorus

?How do you practise the dialogues?
- Listens and correct their
pronunciation

- Asks Ss to read the dialogue
carefully again

?How do you complete the
application form of Nga ?

- Asks ss some questions to check
their understanding

1. What's her name ?
2. Where does she live ?
3. When was she born ?
4. What are her hobbies ?

c.cosolidation(3')

- Summarizes the main content:
Practise the dialogue for details

(7')

- Role play to practise the dialogue
S1: Nga

S2: Secretary

- Correct the mistakes

2.Complete Nga's details (13')
- Work individualy

- Complete Nga's details.
* Answers.

+ Name: Pham Mai Nga

+ Home address: 5 Tran Phu Street
+ Phone number: Not available
+ Date of birth: April 22,1989
+ Sex: Female

+ Interests: drawing,out door
activities, acting

- Answer teacher's open questions

- Listen and remember

d.Home work (2')

- Write 5 sentences about your hobbies
- Do Ex1 +2 (38-39)

- Prepare Unit6:Speak
* Guidings:

- Revise the modals with: May, can, could

- How to practise the dialogue and make similar dialogues by
speaking ?

</div>
(100)<div class='page_container' data-page=100>

Date of preparing: 27.10.2012 Date of teaching:3.11.2012 class8a
2.11.2012 class8b

4.11.2012 class8c

Unit6 : The yuong pioneers club
Period32: Speak-listen

1. The aims of the lesson.

- By the end of the lesson, students will be able to ask for favors and respond to favors or offer
and resond to assistance

a.Knowledge:

Vocabularies
* Structures:

- Asking for favors / Responding to favors
- Offering assistance / Responding to assistance
Grammar.

-Modal: May, can, could
* Intonation:

- Could you do me afavor please ?
- Can you help me carry my bags ?
- May I help you ?

- Certainly. I'll help you

- That's very kind of you.
 b. Skills.

- 4 skills, but pay attention to speaking skill.
c.attitue:

help Ss love lesson

2. Preparation.

a. Teacher: Text book

b,Students: Books and note books

3.proceduce 
* Settling organization the class (1')

Good morning ! How are you to day?
Who's absent to day?

a.Check the old lesson(5 ) ’
* Question:- Do Ex2 (39) sentences a-b-c.

</div>
(101)<div class='page_container' data-page=101>

b,
begins - doesn't hold

c. leave - reach

* Mark: Checks,remarks then gives mark.

b. The new lesson 
 Teacher's activities Students' activities

Stage

Eg:

- Indaily life, we always have to ask

for and respond to favors; offering
assistance and respond to assistance.
? What structures do you know to
express these ideas ?

- Introduces the structures for
students

- Asks Ss the meaning of the word.
favor(sự giúp đỡ, chiếu cố, ân huệ )

?What do you say to ask for afavor?

?When do you say to respond to
favor ?

- Guides Ss the intonation of some
sentences.

+ Could you do me afavor please ?
+ Can you help me carry my bags ?
+ May I help you ?

+Certainly. I'll help you

+ That's very kind of you.
- Reads the first time

- Asks ss to work in pairs to do ex3
(55-56)

- In order to ask for help, which

* Structures.(8')
- Listen and copy

1. Asking for favors. ( Đề nghị đợc
giúp đỡ )

+ Can / could you help me, please ?
+ Could you do me afavor ?

+ I need afavor.

+ Can / could you...?

*Responding to favors: ( Đáp lại
lời đề nghị )

NhËn lêi Tõ chèi

+ Certainly/ sure + I'm sorry. I'm
ofcourse really busy
+ No problem

+ What can I do
for you?
+ How can I help
you?

2. Offering assistance: ( Đa ra đề
nghị giups đỡ )

+ May I help you ?

+ Do you need any help ?
+ Let me help you.

*Responding to assistance: ( Đáp
lại lời đề nghị đợc giúp đỡ )

NhËn lêi Tõ chèi
+ Yes, thank you +No, thank you
+ Yes. That's very +No, thank you
kind of you I'm fine

- Listen to T

- Practise following T in chorus
some times

</div>
(102)<div class='page_container' data-page=102>

structure did Mrs.Ngoc and the
tourist use ? what did they need to
help ?

- Gets Ss to practise speaking in

pairs.

- Stes the scence: Your friend needs
help fixing her bike because she has
s flat tire.

?How do you practise speaking with
this scence ?

- Moves around the class and helps
Ss practice.

- Calls on some pairs to check

- Listens and corrects their
pronunciation

- Now you work in pair. Use the
structures you have learnt and the
situations in the book to make up
new conversations.

?How do you practice speaking with
the situations in the box ?

- Moves around the class and helps
them

- Calls on some pairs to check

- Listens and corrects their
pronunciation

c.cosolidation(5')

- We can use various structures to
ask for and respond to favors. Now
you'll think of a situation and make
up a new dialogue, using the
structures to ask for and respond to
favors.

Eg: Situation: Your neighbor needs
help tidying his yard becauuse she
had broken her leg.

? How do you practise ?

* Answers.

+ Could you do me afavor, please ?
+ What can I do for you ?

+ Can you help me carry my bags?
- Work in pairs by using the
expressions in the box ( to ask for
afavor and respond to afavor )

Eg:

Yourfriend:Could / can you help
me to fix my bike ? I have
a flat tire.

You: Certainly. I'll help you

Your friend: Thank you very much.
That's very kind of you.
- Correct the mistakes

* Practice 2 (11')
- Listen to T

- Discuss in pairs by using the
appropriate phrases in the box (56)
to make similar dialogues

Eg:

S1. Can you help me please ?

S2. Certainly. What can I do for
you /

S1. Can you tell me the way to the
nearest police station ?

S2. Sure. You go along this road and
then turn right / left. Go for
about....kms. It's on your right / left

S1. Thank you very much. That's
very kind of you

S2. Never mind. You are well.
- Correct the mistakes

- Listen and remember

- Work in pairs. ( Role play to
practise)

</div>
(103)<div class='page_container' data-page=103>

- Asks ss to practise in pairs.

d.Home work (2')

- Make up similar dialogue about this situation: Your aunt
wants you to buy some vegetables because she is busy cooking
dinner.

- Prepare Unit6:Listen + Language focus1
* Guidings:

- To make the dialogue you have to use the structures, which
you've learnt in the box (55-sgk )

- Revise the present tense to ask and answer the questions.

---Date of preparing: 27.10.2012 ---Date of teaching:4.11.2012 class8a
5.11.2012 class8b

5.11.2012 class8c

Unit6 : The yuong pioneers club
Period33: Read
1. The aims of the lesson.

- By the end of the lesson, students will be able to know more about a youth organization- the
Boy Scouts of America ( BSA )

a.Knowledge:

Vocabularies
(n).citizenship

(v). encourage, lead, establish
(adj). coeducational, voluntary
Grammar.

- Simple past tense
* Intonation:

Eg: Like the y & Y, the Boy Scouts of America ( BSA ) is a youth organization. it builds
character, and encorage good citizenship and personal fitness

b. Skills.

- 4 skills, but pay attention to read×n skill.
c.attitue:

help Ss love lesson

2. Preparation.

</div>
(104)<div class='page_container' data-page=104>

* Settling organization the class (1')

Good morning ! Are you fine to day?
Who's absent to day?

a.Check the old lesson(5 ) ’
 " Matching "

T: Writes some words on the board, then gets Ss to match the correct pairs
Eg: Raech taer Aim

Ijon Although
Mai Explain
Pexailm Character
Thauolgh Join
Ss: Match the correct pairs

b. The new lesson 
 Teacher's activities Students' activities

Stage

Eg:

- Introduces the new words

? Do you know the meaning of
words ?

- Writes and says the meaning of
words.

(by: translation, antonym, example)

- Gets Ss practise the new words

- Sticks the poster with the
statements on the black board and
guess which is true, which is falsse.
1. The Boy Scouts of America is a
youth organization

2. Scouting began in America

3. William Boyce is a businessman
in Lon don

4. Boys and girls can join BSA

5. The Scouting Association is the
bigest voluntary youth organization
in the world

- Guides Ss the intonation of
sentences

* Like the y & Y, the Boy Scouts of
America ( BSA ) is a youth

1. New words. (5')

+ citizenship (n). quyền công dân
+ encourage (v). khuyến khích
+ lead (v). lãnh đạo

+ establish (v). thiÕt lËp, thành lập
+ co-educational (adj). giáo dục
chung cho nam n÷
+ voluntary(adj). tù ngun,

t×nh ngun
- Read and remember

+Read followingT in chorus(1-2Ts)
+ Read individualy (3-4 Ss)

* T/ F statements prediction (7')

- Discuss in groups to guess which is
true, which is false ?

St Gue Ans Corrcetion
1.

2.
3.

4.
5.

T
F
F

F
T

-Scouy began in
England

- William Boyce
is an American
businessman
- BSA is mainly
for boys

2. Reading (11')

- Listen to T and remember

</div>
(105)<div class='page_container' data-page=105>

organization. it builds character, and
encorage good citizenship and

personal fitness
-Reads the first time

- Gets Ss to practise the text, then
correct falsse statements

- Checks and gives feed back
- Asks ss to read the passage
carefully, then complete the
sentences

?How do you complete the
sentences?

- Calls on some pairs to ask and
answer in front of the class

-Listens,correctstheir pronunciation

- Goves feed back

- Asks Ss to work in pairs. Interview
a member of the Boys scouts of
America

- Calls on an excellent student in
class to practise with the teacher
- Then calls on some pairs of Ss to
play roles of the interviewer and the
member of BSA

* Interview.

1.When did Scouting begin ?

2.When were the mains
established ?

- Correct the falsse statements
- Copy

Ex1: Fill the missing dates.

- Work in pairs to complete the
sentences

(S1 asks the questions, S2 answers )
* Answers.

a. 192012

b,
1909

c. 1910
d. 1994
- Correct and copy

Ex2: Answer the questions.
- Work in pairs

* Answers.

a. Scouting began in England in
192012

The meeting between a boy scout
and mr.William Boyce led to the
Scouts Association Crossing the
Atlantic in 1910

c. Girls can join in the Girls Guides
Association and Camp Fire Boys and
Girls

d. They are building characters, good
citizenship and personal fitness.

- Correct and copy

3. Further practice (10')
- Work in pairs

- An excellent student practise with
the teacher

</div>
(106)<div class='page_container' data-page=106>

3. Can a girl join the BSA ?

4 How many members does the
Scouting Association have now ?
5. Is it the largestvoluntary Youth
organization in the world ?

6. are you happy to join the BSA ?
c.cosolidation(2')

- Summarizes the main content:
Reading comprehension the passage
about the Boys scouts of America

* Member of BSA.
1. In 192012 in England.

2. They were established in 192012.
They are building the characters,
good citizenship and personal fitness
3. No, it is mainly for boys, but girls
can join similar organizations such

as: the Girl Guides association or the
co-edcational Camp Fire Boys and
Girls

4. Over 25 million
5. Yes, of course

6. Yes, I'm happy to be a member of
this organization

- Listen and remember.

d.Home work (2')
- Write the main contents
- Do Ex 3+4 (40-41)
- Prepare Unit6: write
* Guidings:

- Summazie the main contents

- Use the present and past tense to write full sentences
? How to complete the letter ?

---

Date of preparing: 4.11.2012 Date of teaching:10.11.2012 class8a
9.11.2012 class8b

9.11.2012 class8c

Unit6 : The yuong pioneers club
Period34:Write

1. The aims of the lesson.

</div>
(107)<div class='page_container' data-page=107>

a.Knowledge:

Vocabularies

(n).bank, natural resources
(v). raise fund

Grammar.

- Structure: " Be going to "
b. Skills.

- 4 skills, but pay attention to writing skill
c,attitue:

help Ss love lesson

.2. Preparation.
a. Teacher: Text book

b.Students: Books and note books

3.proceduce 
* Settling organization the class (1')

Good morning ! How are you to day?
Who's absent to day?

a.Check the old lesson(5 ) ’
 " Revision of the structure: ' Be going to' "

T: Asks Ss the usage of " Be going to " to express a future plan and gets them to make the
sentence : ( I;m going to + verb ). The verbs have to begin with a letter from A to F

Eg: T. I'm going to accept their invitation
Ss. S1. I'm going to buy a new hat
S2. I'm going to clean the floor
...

Ss: Make up the sentences.
b. The new lesson

Teacher's activities Students' activities
Stage

- Introduces the new words

? Do you know the meaning of
words ?

- Writes and says the meaning of

words.

(by: translation, antonym, example)
- Gets Ss practise the new words

- Asks ss to read the notice (58), then
asks them some questions to check
their understanding

* Questions.

1. New words. (5')
+ bank

+ natural resources: nguån tµi
nguyên thiên nhiên
+ raise fund for: gây quỹ cho / v×
- Read and remember

2.Reading the notice (10')
- Read the notice carefully

- Discuss in pairs to answer the
questions

</div>
(108)<div class='page_container' data-page=108>

?

Eg:

Eg:

a. What do member of the Y & Y
have to do in the recycling program ?
b,

What is the purpose of the recycling
program ?

c.What other programs can members
of theY&Yparticipate in ?

?How do you answer the questions?
- Calls on some Ss to check

- Listens and remarks

- Asks some questions to set the
scence.

? Who writes the letters ? (Nga )
To whom does Nga write ? ( Linh )
Is Nga a member of Y&Y ? ( Yes)
What does Nga write to Linh about
( she writess about the programs of
her school Y&Y that she is going to
participate in )

- Gets Ss to work in pairs to fill in
the gaps in the letter

?What words do you use to fill in the
gaps ?

- Cgecks and remarks

-Sets the scence: Hoa talks to her
aunt about the Y&Y Green Group,
about the activities that she is going
to do.

- Asks Ss to read the dialogue

- Asks them some questions to check
their understanding

1. Why does Hoa look happy ?

2. What is she going to do in the
enviroment month ?

3. What are they doing to earn
money for their school Y&Y ?

- Now you'll help Hoa to write a
letter to her parents

- Moves around the class and helps
Ss

- Calls on some Ss to read their letter
- Listens and remarks

a. They have to collect glass, paper
and can to send them for recycling
b,

The purpose of the recycling
program is to save natural resources
and to earn money for the
organization

c. They can participate in other
programs such as raising funds for
the poor, helping street children,
planting trees and flowers along the
side walks or in the parks.

- Correct the mistakes
- copy

* Complete the letter.

- Answer the questions - Discuss in
pairs to fill in the gaps to complete
the letter

* Answers.

1. community / 6. save
2. recycling / 7. raise

3. collect / 8. participating
4. send / 9. planting
5. recycling / 10. helping
- Correct the mistakes

- Copy

3.Reading the dialogue (15')

- Listen to T - Work in pairs ( role
play to read the dialogue carefully )
- Answer the questions

* Answers.

1. Because she is able to join in the
Y & Y Green Group

2. She is going to clean the lake's
banks, plant trees and flowers in the
park and water them

3. They are going to plant young
trees to sell to some schools

- Discuss in groups (4-5 Ss) to write
a letter

</div>
(109)<div class='page_container' data-page=109>

- Gives feed back
* Suggested letter.
Dear Mom and Dad,

I'm very happy to tell you that I;m
able to join in the Y&Y Green Group
of my school.

The Green Group is holding an
enviroment month plan. We are
going to clean the lake's banks on
weekends, we are also going to plant
trees and flowers in the park and
water them every afternoon after
class. we are planting young trees
and plant to sell the other schools.
I hope that we can bring more
green to the city and earn some
money for the school Y&Y. The
program is very interesting and
useful, isn't it ?

I'm still in avery good health. I will
tell you more about the group
activities later.

With love

Hoa.
c.cosolidation(2')

- Summarizes the main content: write
a letter about a future plan using " Be
going to ".

- Look at and read the suggested
letter. Then can correct the mistakes
by them selves

- Listen and remember

d.Home work (2')

- Complete Hoa's letter to her mother and father
- Do Ex 5(42)

- Prepare Unit6:Language focus2-3
* Guidings:

- Help Hoa to write a letter to her parents (59)
? How to practise the exercises (61-62-sgk )

Date of preparing: 4.11.2012 Date of teaching:11.11.2012 class8a
9.11.2012 class8b

</div>
(110)<div class='page_container' data-page=110>

Unit6 : The yuong pioneers club

Period35: Language focus

1. The aims of the lesson.

- By the end of the lesson, students will be able to complete a song by listening for details and
use simple present tense to talk about future activities

a.Knowledge:

. Vocabularies

(n).peace, cultural-sport, garbage
(v).unite, support

(adv). elderly
. Grammar.

- Simple present tense
 b. Skills.

- 4 skills, but pay attention to listeing and speaking skills.
c,attitue:

help Ss love lesson

2. Preparation.

a. Teacher: Text book, posters
b,Students: Books and note books

3.proceduce 
* Settling organization the class (1')

Good morning ! Are you fine to day?
Who's absent to day?

a.Check the old lesson(5 ) ’

* Question: Read your dialogue about the situation: Your aunt wants you to buy some
vegetables because she is busy cooking dinner

* Key: (omit)

* Mark: Listens, remarks then gives mark

b. The new lesson 
 Teacher's activities Students' activities

Stage

- Introduces the new words

? Do you know the meaning of
words ?

- Writes and says the meaning of
words.

(by: translation, antonym, example)
- Gets Ss practise the new words
- Asks Ss to guessthe words to fill in
the gaps in the song (56)

- Gets them to share or compare
- Now you'll listen to the song and
then fill in the mising words to
complete the song

- Lets Ss listen to 2 times ( T reads
the song )

?What word do you choose to guess
to fill in each gap in the song?

1. New words. (5')
+ peace (n). sù yªn tÜnh

+ cultural-sport (n).hoạt động VH
thể thao

+ garbage (n).rác

+ unite (v).đoàn kết, liên kết
+ support (v). cổ vũ

+ elderly (adv). một cách già dặn
- Read and remember

+Read followingT in chorus(1-2Ts)
+ Read individualy (3-4 Ss)

2. Fill in the mising words (13')
- Guess the mising words

- Share or compare with their
partners

- Listen to the song 2 times
- Fill in the mising words to
complete the song

* Answers.
Gu

</div>
(111)<div class='page_container' data-page=111>

Eg:

( world, of, unite, north, south, place,
out, right, peace )

?Can you listen ?

?How do you complete the song ?
- Calls on some Ss to write their
answer

- Gets Ss to listen the song last time
to check

- Gives feed back

- Introduces the dialogue: A and B
are members of the Y & Y
organization. They are talking about
the Spring activity program.

- Asks Ss to use the given words to
complete the following dialogue
( what time do, finish, when do,
whrn do, we start at, finish at, an
empty garbage )

A:..(1)...we collect and empty
garbage ?

B: At Dong Xuan Market
A:...(2)..we collect...(3)...?
B: On January 9

A:...(4)..we star and...(5)...?
B:..(6)..8 a.m and..(7)..5 p.m

- Lets Ss role play of A and B to
practise the dialogue

- Asks Ss some questions to check
their understanding

?When do we use " Where " ?
-When do we use "When " ?
 -When do we use " What time " ?
-Is the date at present or in the
future ?

-What tense do we use in the
dialogue ?

=> WE use simple present tense to
express an action that happens in the
future

- Asks Ss to practice asking and
answering about the Y & Y activity
program by using the cues in the
table (60)

- Moves around the class and helps
Ss practice asking and answering
- Calls on some pairs to check
?How do you ask and answer ?
- Listens and remarks

c.cosolidation(3')

- Summarizes the main content:
+ Listening for details to complete
the song

+ Use simple present to express an
action that happens in the future

" Children of our land unite
Let's sing for peace

Let's sing for right

Let's sing for love between
North and South

Oh children of ourland unite
Children of the world hold
hands

Let's show our love from
place to place

Let's show out loud
Let's make a stand
- Listen to the song last time
- Correct and copy

3. Ask and answer questions about

Y&Y Spring activity program (16')
- Listan to T

- Discuss in groups to complete the
dialogue

- Share with other groups
* Answers.

(1). Where do
(2). When do

(3). an empty garbage
(4). What time do
(5). finish

(6). We start at
(7). finish at
- Work in pairs

- Answer the questions
+ to ask for the place
+ to ask for the date
+ to ask for the time
+ in the future

+ simple present tense
- Listen and remember

-Work in pairs.(S1asks,S2answers )

Eg:

S1. Where do they plant and
water trees ?

S2. In the City center streets.
S1. When do they plant and water
trees ?

S2. On February 2

S1. What time do they start and
finish at 10a.m

- Do the same with other cues
- Correct the mistakes

</div>
(112)<div class='page_container' data-page=112>

d.Home work (2')

- Write on their note books the report on the Y & Y
organization Spring activity program

- Prepare Unit6: Read
* Guidings:

* Eg: On January 9, the students collect and empty garbage at
Dong Xuan Market between 8 a.m and 5 p.m.

- Read to find out the new words/ new structure
? How to answer the questions ?

Date of preparing: 4.11.2012 Date of teaching:11.11.2012 class8a
12.11.2012 class8b

12.11.2012 class8c

Period : 36

REVISION

1.aims:

-Students can remind and use the knowledge that they have been studied exactly

-a.Knowledge:
-Grammar :

+ Past simple tense
+ Prepositions of time
+ Used to

+ Modal : should

+ Commands, requests and advice in reported speech
 + Present tense with future meaning

+ Modal : may, can, could
 + Gerunds

b.skill:

Develope speaking, reading and writing skills
c.attitue:

help Ss love lesson

2. Preparation.

a. Teacher: Text book, posters
b,Students: Books and note books

b. The new lesson 
 Teacher's activities Students' activities

Stage

1.Warm up (5 )’

-Has Ss answer some questions
-Calls on Ss answer aloud

-Listen to the teacher

</div>
(113)<div class='page_container' data-page=113>

Eg:

-Gives feedback

2. Practice :(33 )’

-Explains how to do exercise
-Asks Ss to do the task

-Lets them compare with a parner
-Calls on some Ss give their result
-Checks and gives feedback

-Guides Ss how to do exercise
-Asks Ss to do the task

-Lets them compare with a parner
-Calls on some Ss give their result
-Checks and gives feedback

-Did you used to like milk?
-Did you eat noodles for lunch?

-Which subject did you have
yesterday?

-When do you do your homework?
-Listen and take notes

-Work in individual
-Pair work

-Talk aloud

-Listen and take notes

I . Complete the sentences with the 
suitable words or phrases in the 
bracket(5 )’

1. ……….. problem , sir ! ( any /
without / no )

2. ……… I help you , madam ?
( should / may / need )

3. Yes . That is very …………of you
. ( help / kind / fine )

4. Could you ………….. me a
favor ? ( do / make / take )

5. I am ………….. . I am really busy

. ( pity / not good / sorry )

6. Do you…………. any help ?
( have / need / think )

7. Are you …………forward to the
vacation ? ( look / to look / looking )
8. ………... me help you . ( give / let
/ ask )

Work in individual
-Pair work

-Write on the board
-Listen and take notes

</div>
(114)<div class='page_container' data-page=114>

-Explains how to do exercise
-Asks Ss to do the task

-Calls on some group give their
result

-Checks and gives feedback

-Explains how to do exercise and
gives example

-Asks Ss to do the task

-Lets them compare with a

parner-Calls on some Ss give their result
-Checks and gives feedback

brackets:(5 )’

1. Nam hates (go)... to
the market.

2. When I was a child, I used
(cry)... a lot.
3. The doctor asked him
(take) ... a rest.

4. Mrs Smith loves ( plant)
roses in the garden.

…………

4. Yesteday, I was busy so I (not
have) ... time to phone
you.

5. I ( start )………….. learning
English three years ago.

6. The moon (go)……….. around
the Earth .

-Work in group and write on their
extraboard

-Stick their answers on the board
-Listen and take notes

III.Fill in the blanks with the 
approriate prepositions(7 )’

1. What do you do …….. Sunday?
2. I was born ………….. january 1st, 
1965

3. It often rains …………October in
Viet Nam.

4. What are you going to ………
2004?

5. I don’t know but I am going to go
to the college ………….. September
this year.

6. She often hears some strange
noise …………midnight.

Does it rain ………Spring?
7. We must learn to behave

.the right way.

………

8. My mother is always proud
... my brother.

…………

9. Could you turn ………… the
light, please? It’s dark in here.

10. I go to the market ………. order
to buy some food.

-Work in individual
-Pair work

Write on the board

</div>
(115)<div class='page_container' data-page=115>

-Guides Ss how to do exercise
-Asks Ss to do the task

-Lets them compare with a parner
-Calls on some Ss give their result
-Checks and gives feedback

reported speech : (8’)

Ex :

- I said to my son : “Go to bed!”
I told my son to go tobed.

1. My husband said to me : “Go to
the movie!”

2. I said to him : “Stay at home!”
3. My son said to us : “Watch T.V!”
4. He said to her : “Can you speak
up?”

5. The teacher said to the children :
“Don’t make noise in class!”

6.The doctor said to the patient :
“You should stay in bed”

-Work in individual
-Pair work

-Talk aloud

-Listen and take notes
V. Choose a,b,c,d(5ms)
1. It’s too cold today.
You... go out.

A. should B.shouldn’t
C. didn’t D. must

2. the police asked him ...
he did last night

A. where B. what
C. to D. if

3 . My mother asked me ...
some food.

A. to buy B. buy
C. buys D. buying
4. Minh hates ………. to the market
A.to go B.go
C. going D. goes
5. Lan has to stay at home

to... her sister

A. look at B. look into
C. look for D. look after
6. My father used to … us to the
movie theater

A. take B. get
C. see D. meet
7. I don’t understand this wond
‘bird nest’. Can you help me to...
it?

</div>
(116)<div class='page_container' data-page=116>

c.Consolidation :(5 )’

- Ask Ss to check their answer in part
presentation

-Gives feedback

A. make B. do
C. put D. lay

9. I know she worked really …. this
semester

A. hardly B. hard
C. good D. bad
10. Thanh: Can you help me?
Minh: ...

A. No, I can’t B.Sorry. I
can’t C. No, thank you
D.Sure, I can’t

VI . Read the passage carefully ,
then answer the questions

below(5 ) .’

It was the first lesson after the
summer holidays at a small school in
England . The lesson was about the
seasons of the year . “ There are four
seasons in the year , “ said the

teacher . “ They are Spring , Summer

, Autumn and Winter . In Spring it is
warm and everything begins to
grow . In summer it is hot and there
are many flowers in the fields and
gardens . In Autumn there are many
vegetables and much fruit .

Everybody likes to eat fruit . In
summer it is cold and it often rains .
Sometimes there is snow on the
ground. “ Here the teacher stopped
and looked at one of the pupils , “
Stop talking , Tom , “ he said . “ Now
listen to me . Can you tell us when is
the best time of apples ?”

“ Yes , sir ,” answered Tom . “ It is
when the farmer is not at home and
there is not dog in the garden.”

Questions :

1. Where did the lesson take place?
2. What was the lesson about?
3. What did the teacher ask Tom to
do?

4. What was Tom,s answer?

Talk aloud

-Take notes

d.Home work (2')

</div>
(117)<div class='page_container' data-page=117>

****************************************************************

Date of planing : 10 / 11 / 10 Date of teaching:17.11.2012 class8a
16.11.2012 class8b

15.11.2012 class8c

period : 37

written test - 45

’

1.Aims

a.Knowledge:Help ps to check and justify their knowledge about vocabulary, grammar and 
structures

b.skills:Help them to practise futher more about their doing exercise skills.

c.atittue: Build them careful character in doing exercises and they love learning English

2.Preparation: 
a.Tt : Lesson plan, paper test .

a.Ss : Revising the old lesson, preparing carefully for this test.
3.Procedue:

a.Check old lesson:

b.content the test(45 )’

*. Warm up:

Question
Class:8A

(1).Choose the best answer A, B or C

a.The step-mother was very cruel………..Littler Pea
A. with B. to C. of

b. When the prince found her shoes, he decided ……..her
A. to marry B.marrying C. marry

c. When were you born ? I was born …….November 1993
A. on B. at C. in

d.Tim’s mother is always proud ……… him because he works so hard
A. of B. with C. about

e. Some people try tolearn new words ……..heart
A. at B. with C. by

f. Many learners do not try to learn words they come ……….
A. across B. over C.up

</div>
(118)<div class='page_container' data-page=118>

h. Can you ……. me a favor ? How can I help you?
A. do B. help C give
(2).Put the verbs in the correct form.

a.He enjoys (swim)………… in the early morning and………(play) sport is good for
himself.

b. Most people have the plan to help them by (encourage) …………...them do things.
c. Mr. Jackson asked me (give)………… you this dictionary.

d. Can you ( help)………. me ?.

e.When he (be) ………a boy . He used to (stay)………. at home a lone.
(3).Rewrite the sentences , using the words provided.

a.Can you speak more slowly .He said to me.

->He asked me to………..

b. Don’t come before 6 o’clock .I said to him ..

->I told him………..

c. You should learn harder . Mrs Jackson said to John.
-> Mrs Jackson advise John………..

->Mrs Jackson said………

d. It is interesting to go camping.

->Going………

(4).Fill in the blank with a suitable word.

a> Long long ……(1), there(2) ………a King who liked to eat fish . His love for fish was
(3) ……great that he could (4) ……nothing if there was no fish on the table .

b.They used (5)…… feed their dog 3 times a day .
(5). Complete the meaningful sentences .

a. I/used/stay/farm/with /grand parents/parents.

………

b. When /you /born ?and when/your brother/born ?

………

Class: 8B.

(1).Choose the best answer A, B or C .

a.The step-mother was very cruel………..Littler Pea
A. to B. with C. of
b. She decided ……..after an orphan

A.looking B. to look C. looks

c. When were you born ? I was born …….November 1993

A. on B. at C. in

d.Tim’s mother is always proud ……… him because he works so hard
A. of B. with C. about

e. Some people try to learn new words ……..heart
A. at B. with C. by

f. Many learners do not try to learn words they ………. across
A.go B. come C.meet

g. I write new words and stick them around my house in order……. learn them at any time
A. to B. on C. so

h. Can you ……. me a favor ? How can I help you?
A. do B. help C give
(2).Put the verbs in the correct form.

a.He likes (sing)………… and he hates (do)his homework.
b. They came there by (take)……. a bus from early morning .
c. Mr. Jackson told me (help)………… you with your English..

d. When she (be) ………twelve .She used to (have) ……to look after her younger sister .
e. Robert (not like) …….. going to the movie .

(2).Rewrite the sentences , using the are words (the words provided)
a.Can you help me? He said to me.

->He asked me to………..

b. “Keep silent, please ”

</div>
(119)<div class='page_container' data-page=119>

c. You should learn harder . Mrs Jackson said to John.
-> Mrs Jackson advised John………..
d. It is interesting to go camping.

->Going………

(3).Fill in the blank with a suitable word ( so; was; ago; as; eat)

a> Long long (1)….. , there(2) ………a King who liked to eat fish . His love for fish was
(3) ……great that he could (4) ……nothing if there was no fish on the table

b>They underlined the new words so(5)……..to remember the important words .
(4). Complete the meaningful sentences .

a. I/used/stay/farm/with /grand parents/parents.

………

c. I /alsothink /about /participate/plant /tree or /help/ street children.

………

Class:8C

(1).Choose the best answer A, B or C

a.The step-mother was very cruel………..Littler Pea
A. with B. to C. of

b. When the prince found her shoes, he decided ……..her
A. to marry B.marrying C. marry

c. When were you born ? I was born …….November 1993
A. on B. at C. in

d.Tim’s mother is always proud ……… him because he works so hard
A. of B. with C. about

e. Some people try tolearn new words ……..heart
A. at B. with C. by

f. Many learners do not try to learn words they come ……….
A. across B. over C.up

g. I write new words and stick them around my house …….order to learn them at any time
A. in B. on C. so

h. Can you ……. me a favor ? How can I help you?
A. do B. help C give
(2).Put the verbs in the correct form.

a.He enjoys (watch) ………… sports on TV and(play)……. sport is good for himself.
b. Most people have the plan to help them by (collect) …………...the used papers.
c. Mrs. Jackson asked me (give)………… you this dictionary.

d. Can you ( help)………. me ?.

e.When he (be) ………ten . His father used to (take)……….him to the movies.
(2).Rewrite the sentences , using the are words (the words provided).

a.Can you speak more slowly .He said to me.

->He asked me to………..

b. Don’t come before 6 o’clock .I said to him ..

->I told him………..

c. You should learn harder . Mrs Jackson said to John.
-> Mrs Jackson advised John………..
d. It is interesting to read books in free time.

->Reading………

(3).Fill in the blank with a suitable word

a> Long long (1)….. , there(2) ………a King who liked to eat fish . His love for fish was
(3) ……great that he could (4) ……nothing if there was no fish on the table

b>They underlined the new words so(5)……..to remember the important words .
(4). Complete the meaningful sentences .

a. Lan/used/get/good grade/ .When/ she/ be/ grade 4.

………

b. You/ need/ help? .Yes. Can you/ fill/ this form/me?

………

</div>
(120)<div class='page_container' data-page=120>

Class:8A

(1).Choose the best answer A, B or C (2 points)
a.B - b.A - c.C - d.A - e. C - f. A - g.A - h. A

(2).Put the verbs in the correct form. (3.5points)
a. swimming / playing .

b. encourging
c. to give
d. help

e.was / to stay .

(3).Rewrite the sentences , using the words provided (2 points).
a. He asked me to speak more slowly.

b. I told him not come before 6 o’clock.
c. Mrs Jackson advise John to learn harder .
d. Going camping is interesting.

(4)Fill in the blank with a suitable word(1.5 points)

1 ago 2 .was 3. so. 4 eat 5. to.
(5). Complete the meaningful sentences (1 points).

a. I used to stay on a farm .

b. when were you born ? and when was your brother born ?

8B

………

(1).Choose the best answer A, B or C (2 points) 
a.A - b.B - c.C - d.A - e. C - f. B - g.A - h. A

(2).Put the verbs in the correct form. (3.5points)
a. singing / doing .

b. taking
c. to help
d. was
f.have.

e. does not like

(3).Rewrite the sentences , using the words provided.
a. He asked me to help him.

b. I told him to keep silent.

c. Mrs Jackson advise John to learn harder .
d. Going camping is interesting.

(4)Fill in the blank with a suitable word ( so; was; ago; as; eat)
1 ago 2 .was 3. so. 4 eat 5. as.

(5). Complete the meaningful sentences

a. I used to stay on a farm with my grandparents and my parents.

b. I also thing about participating in planting trees or helping street children.

Class:8C

(1).Choose the best answer A, B or C (2 points)
a.B - b.A - c.C - d.A - e. C - f. A - g.A - h. A

(2).Put the verbs in the correct form. (3.5points)
a. watching / playing .

b. collecting
c. to give
d. help
e.was / stay .

</div>
(121)<div class='page_container' data-page=121>

a. He asked me to speak more slowly.
b. I told him not come before 6 o’clock.
c. Mrs Jackson advise John to learn harder .

d. Reading books in free time is interesting.
 (4)Fill in the blank with a suitable word(1.5 points)

1 ago 2 .was 3. so. 4 eat 5. as.
(5). Complete the meaningful sentences (1 points).

a. Lan used to get good gradewhen she was in grade 4

b. Do you need any help? Yes.Can you fill in this form for me?
* hand in the paper test and give remarks .

d.home work

- Prepare Unit 7 “getting started + listen and read ” for the next lesson.
`

Lơp Si số Giỏi Khá T.bình Yêu Kém

8A 24

SL % SL % SL % SL % SL %

8B 29

8C 28

********************************************************************
Date of planing : 10 / 11 / 10 Date of teaching:17.11.2012 class8a
16.11.2012 class8b

18.11.2012 class8c

Period : 38

TEST CORRECTION 
1.Aims

a.Knowledge:

- Help sts to realize their mistakes and then they will be able to remember the grammar and
structures of the old lesson. Moreover they can avoid these mistakes when using their

language.
b.Skills:

- Improve sts’reading and writing skills
c.attitue:

- Help ps to love learning English and have good exercise doing skill.
2.preparation

a.Ts : Lesson plan, teacher’s book, student’s book.

b.Ss : Learning the old lesson, preparing for the new one, student’s book.
3.

procedure:

</div>
(122)<div class='page_container' data-page=122>

? / Đặt câu với thì HTHT sử dụng since hoặc for

*.answer

-Sts’ answer

b.new lesson:(35 )’

stage * warm-up
* Introduction:

- Have sts play game called “hang man”. Divide
sts into 2 groups to find the word

present perfect

Correcting 8A’s paper test

- Have sts read the question I’s requirement of the
test.

- Have sts read the questions from 1 to 8 and ask
sts to give the answers then they have to explain
the reason why

- T give feedback.
+ cruel to sb
+ decide to do st
+ proud of
+ learn by heart

- Have question II written on the board and ask sts

to write the answers.

- Have sts write some structures such as
+ enjoy + V-ing

+ ask sb to do st

+ used to + V(bare inf)
Give the key.

a. swimming / playing .
b. encourging

c. to give
d. help

e.was / to stay .

- Have ps read the sentences and explain some
structures

+ tell sb to do st

+ advise sb to do st / advise sb should do st
- Ask ps to write down the answer into their
notebooks

a. He asked me to speak more slowly.
b. I told him not come before 6 o’clock.
c. Mrs Jackson advise John to learn harder .

d. Going camping is interesting.

- Have ps read the short passage and sentence to
find the words to fill in

- Explain some structures or phrases 
+ long long ago= once upon the time
+ there is + a …

+ so… that

- Ask ps to write down the answer into their
notebooks

1 ago 2 .was 3. so. 4 eat
5. to.

- Ask ps to write the meaningful sentences, correct
their sentences

- Write on the board

- Play game in 2 groups

- Read aloud

- read the questions from 1
to 8

- give the answers

- give the reason

- Correct and remember

Copy the key into their
notebooks

- Read the sentences and
explain some structures
- Write down the answer
into their notebooks

- Read the exercise and
give the answer

</div>
(123)<div class='page_container' data-page=123>

a. I used to stay on a farm .

b. when were you born ? and when was your
brother born ?

Correcting 8B’s paper test

- Have sts read the question I’s requirement of the
test.

- Have sts read the questions from 1 to 8 and ask
sts to give the answers then they have to explain
the reason why

- T give feedback.

+ cruel to sb
+ decide to do st
+ proud of
+ learn by heart
+ come across
+ in order to
+ do sb a favor

- Have question II written on the board and ask sts
to write the answers.

- Have sts write some structures such as
+ like + V-ing

+ tell sb to do st

+ used to + V(bare inf)
Give the key.

a. singing / playing .
b. taking

c. to help
d. was/ have
e.does not .

- Have ps read the sentences of question III and
explain some structures

+ ask sb to do st

+ tell sb to do st

+ advise sb should do st

- Ask ps to write down the answer into their
notebooks

a. He asked me to help him.
b. I told him to keep silent.

c. Mrs Jackson advise John to learn harder .
d. Going camping is interesting.

- Have ps read the short passage and sentence of
question IV to find the words to fill in

- Explain some structures or phrases 
+ long long ago= once upon the time
+ there is + a …

+ so… that

- Ask ps to write down the answer into their
notebooks

1 ago 2 .was 3. so. 4 eat
5. to.

- Ask ps to write the meaningful sentences, correct
their sentences

a. I used to stay on a farm with my
grandparents and my parents.

b. I also thing about participating in planting

- Write the meaningful
sentences, correct their
sentences into notebooks

- Read aloud

- read the questions from 1
to 8

- give the answers
- give the reason

- Correct and remember

Copy the key into their
notebooks

- Read the sentences and
explain some structures
- Write down the answer
into their notebooks

</div>
(124)<div class='page_container' data-page=124>

trees or helping street children.
Correcting 8C’s paper test

- Have sts read the question I’s requirement of the
test.

- Have sts read the questions from 1 to 8 and ask
sts to give the answers then they have to explain
the reason why

- T give feedback.
+ cruel to sb
+ decide to do st
+ proud of
+ learn by heart

- Have question II written on the board and ask sts
to write the answers.

- Have sts write some structures such as
+ enjoy + V-ing

+ ask sb to do st

+ used to + V(bare inf)
Give th

c.consolidation:(3 )’

-remind main knowledge today
d.home work:(2’)

-Prepare Unit7 “getting started + listen and read”
for the next lesson.

- Write down the answer
into their notebooks

- Write the meaningful
sentences, correct their
sentences into notebooks

-remindand take note
-take note

Date of planing : 10 / 11 / 10 Date of teaching:18.11.2012 class8a
19.11.2012 class8b

19.11.2012 class8c

Period : 39 - UNIT 7 : MY NEIGHBORHOOD

Getting started + listen and read

1.Aims

a.Knowledge:
-vocabulary

pancakes ,corner
-Grammar

b.skills:

-help Ss practice 4 skills
c.attitue:

</div>
(125)<div class='page_container' data-page=125>

2.preparation :

a.Ts : Lesson plan, teacher’s book, student’s book, picture, tape.

b.Ss : Learning the old lesson, preparing for the new one, student’s book.
3.procedure:

a.check old lesson(omit)
b.new lesson:

stage *Warm -up :

1.Getting started:(15 )’

-Have ps look at the 6 pictures page63 and read the
words in the box.

-Texplaims the word :wetmarket

-Ask ps to match the words with the pictures and
compare with the partners

-Have ps practise and exchage with partner.
Eg: p1: what is this

P2:A stadium

P3: Is thereb a stadium in your
neingborhood ?

-Have some pairs practise before te classand give the
correct answers.

a. glocerly store
b. stadium

c. wet market
d. drugstores
e.hairdresser’s
f. swimming pool
 2.New words.(7 )’

-Have ps listen to the tape and explain the new words
+pawcake (n) bánh tiêu

+serve(v) phucj vụ

?/What will you do to help your new neinh box.
?/Are you ready to help him / her ?

-Na is a new comer in this area . she doesn’t know
about the neinhborhood . she is asking nam some in

formation .

-Let ps listen to the tape (3 times)

-ask ps to wtire down the information they hear
+the way

+the market
+ fast food shop

-Have ps practise reading in pairs and correct their
mistaks in pronuciation.

-Askps to find the sentences that use ‘since for’.
-Write the sentences on the B.N

+we have lived here for about 10 years.
+w have been here since last week

- Ask ps to give remarks about the 2 sentences
- Help ps to understand the new grammar.
 3.Practise.(15 )’

-Have ps practise reading the conversation beforethe
class .

- look at the 6 pictures.
-read the words in the
box .

-take notes

-match the words with
the pictures

and compare with the
partners.

-practise and exchange

practise bfore the class

- listen to the tape.
Take notes.

-answer

-think about the

information Na wants to
know.

-Listen to the tape

-Practise reading
-Underline the words
and sentences

</div>
(126)<div class='page_container' data-page=126>

-Have ps practise asking and answering the questions.
a. who are talking ?

b. Is Nanew here ?

c. how long has Nam lived here ?

d. what does Na want to know about the area
-Ask ps to read in silence individally.

-Have ps practise asking and answering before the
class.

a. Na and Nam are talking
b. yes,she is

c. He has lived here for 10 years

-Have ps read the cowersation once again and do the
exercise 2 page 64.

-Ask ps to write the correct answer on the B.B
a. new

b. last week
c. tired
d. restaurant
e. Hue
f. pancakes.
c.consolidation:(5 )’

-Give the situation:Na is a new comer in Hue .she

wants to know more information about this city . Now
act as Na and Nam .Ask and answer about Hue using
pictures and words from “Getting started -p63”

- Have ps work in pairs.
d.homework:(3 )’

- Write the answer in the notebook

- Learn by heart the cowersation and write the same
one

- Prepare parts: speaking and listening for the next
lesson .

-Give remarks
-Take notes

-Practise reading aloud
-Practise asking and
ansewring

-Read individually
-Practise before the
class.

-Read the conversation
again

-Do the exercise

individually and
compare with partner

- correct
-play role as Na and
Nam

-Do as teacher requires

-work in pairs
- do at home.

**********************************************************

Date of planing : 18 / 11 / 10 Date of teaching:24.11.2012 class8a
23.11.2012 class8b

22.11.2012 class8c

Period : 40 - UNIT 7

: SPEAK AND LISTEN

</div>
(127)<div class='page_container' data-page=127>

a.Knowlege: -Help ps to improve the speaking , help them know bow to talk about the
posting letter and parcel.

-After finishing this lesson ps can know how to talk to the clerk in the post office .
-What they need do at the post office.

+envelope +surace
+airmail +by plane
+oversea

b.skills:

-Help ps to improve their listening skill . After finishing the lesson ps can fill in the blank of
the advertisoment and find out the false information.

c.Attitue:

- Help ps to love learning English

2.preparation: 
a.Tt: Lesson plan, teacher’s book, student’s book, tape .

b.Ss: Learning the old lesson, preparing for the new one, student’s book.
3.procedure :

a.check old lesson(5 )’
. question

?/ Ask ps to read by heart the dialogue between Nam and Na on page 62.
. answer.

- Read it by heart fluently and aloud before the class.
 b.new lesson:

stage

*Warm up(5 )’
Introduction

- Have ps play game ‘hang man’to find the word ‘
surface’.

1.Speaking(12 )’
Pre - speaking

?/ what can you do at the post office ?
- Ask ps to observe the picture on page 64.
?/ what does Mrs Kim want to do ?

- Have ps listen to the tape and repeat after.
- Have some pairs practise before the class.

While - Speaking

- Ask ps to read the words in the box once
- Have 1pupil work with the T

Eg: T: I’d like to send this letter to Ha Noi

S: Do you want to send it air mail or surface
mail?

T: How much is air mail?

S: Let me weigh the letter first . Oh, 20g.That’ll

be 1,200 dong

T: Here you are.
S: Thank you.

- Ask ps to read the conversation in pairs then they
have to use the information in the box to make the
new conversations like the sample

- Have some pairs practise before the class in turn.
- Give feedback.

- Speak aloud before the
class.

- - Play game in groups

- Answer the T’s
questions

- observe the picture on
page 64.

- listen to the tape and
repeat after

- read the words in the
box once

</div>
(128)<div class='page_container' data-page=128>

Post - Speaking

- Ask ps to practise speaking using the information:
+ Parcel / Hai Phong / surface mail / 2 kg

- Have ps practise speaking before the class.
2. Listening(17 )’

Pre - listening :

- ?/ What do of ten do on the weekend ?
?/ Where do you often go to…?

- Na is a newcomer. She is taking Nam about
what she is going to do on the weekend.
Now read the adver tisement.

- Explain the new words :
+ Millenium cinema.
+ Culture house
While - listening

Let’s ps listen to the tape to fill in the blak the words
provided in the box on page 66.

- ASK ps to exchange their answers.

- Let ps listen to the tape the second time and check
their answer.

- Correct the mistakes and listen to the sentence by

sentence.

- 1. New comer
2.Town ground.

3. English speaking contest.
4. Culture house.

- Ask ps to listen to the tape once again and find the
F,T,No information answers .

- Have ps check their answer.

- Have ps listen to the tape and check their answers to
corvect on the B.B.

- a/ T

- b/ F

- c/ F

- d/ T

- e/ T

- f/ N information

Post - listening

- Let ps play the game called “ find the one who”.
- draw a table with 2 column.

What todo on the weekend ? Name
Go to the movie

Go shopping
Visit the museum
Go swimming

- read the conversation
in pairs

- use the information in
the box to make the new
conversations like the
sample

- practise in pairs before
the class in turn.

- to practise speaking
using the information:

- answer
I go to
- Listen to T
- take notes

- listen to the tape and
fillin the blank the
words.

- exchange their answer
- listen to the tape once
a gain .

- check the answers
- correct

- listen again.

- check and correct.

</div>
(129)<div class='page_container' data-page=129>

c.consolidation: (3 )’

-remid main knowledge,Ask Ss take note
d. Homework(2 )’

- Learn the lesson and do exercises in work books
(page )

- prepare reading part carefully for the next lesson.

asking and answering
befove class in pairs.
-Listen and take note
- do at home

******************************************************************
Date of planing : 18 / 11 / 10 Date of teaching:25.11.2012 class8a
23.11.2012 class8b

25.11.2012 class8c

Period : 41 - UNIT 7

:

READ

1.Aims

a.Knowledge:

-After finishing this lesson ps can do T/F exercise and correct the false statements. Ps can
answer the question from a to d on page 68.

- Help ps grasp the new words.

+resident +discount
+convenient +roof
b.skills:

improve their reading comprehension skill
c.Attitue:

- Help ps to love learning English

2.preparation: 
a.Tt: Lesson plan, teacher’s book, student’s book.

b.Ss: Learning the old lesson, preparing for the new one, student’s book.
3

.procedure:

a.Check old lesson:(5 )’
* question

?/ Ask ps to complete sentences by putting since / for into each gap
a. He’s been in China………..January.

b. She’s lived in Ha Noi………1950…….15 years
*. answer.

a. since
b. since/ for
b.new lesson:

Stage *Warm up(3 )’
 Introduction

</div>
(130)<div class='page_container' data-page=130>

the word “discount”

r

ead

Pre – reading(10’)

1. New words:

- Draw a house on the B.B and explain the new

words by this picture.

This is a …

- Convenient = easy :

- resident : people who live in the area.
- discount (adj ) (v)

- Ask ps to read new words aloud

- Have some ps read aloud before the class.
=> A new shopping mall is opening in Nam’s
neighbor hood. The residents and the store
owners in the area have been concerned about
the new shopping mall. Greess 5 reasons ?
While - reading:(12 )’

- Have ps read the text in silence, and check the
right guessing sentences.

+ They can buy every thing there.

+ The goods in the mall are the cheapest
+ There are air condi tion ers in the mall
+ Children can play games there

+ The owners of the dtores nearby can’t sell
goods.

- Ask ps to read the second time in silence and
read the exercise 1 (page 68 )

- Have ps give the answers and correct the false
information .

2. True/ false statement on page 68
a/ F: the mall is open daily (7 days )

b/ F: there are 50 stores in the mall c/ F: not
every one is pleased about.

d/ T
e/ T.

- Ask ps to read the text again

- Have ps work in pairs (practice asking and
answering the questions )

- Have ps practice before the class
- Have them give the correct answers.
3. answer the questions

a/ It’s very diffierent from the present shopping
area. All the shops are under one roof . That
will be very convenient, especially during the
hot summer months.

b/ In the shoping mall, there are 50 air

conditioned speciality stores, 4 movie theatres
and 10 restaurants, there is also a children’s
play area.

c/ They think the new shopping mall will take
their business.

d/ The stores in the mall will often a wider

- Play game in 1 team

- listen to T and take notes.

- read aloud after T.

- listen to T and guess the 5
reasous .

- exchange the book and
--compans the answers.
- Read and check.

- read the second time in
silence.

- give the answer and correet
the false information.

- read the text again.

- work in pairs

- practice before the class in
pairs.

</div>
(131)<div class='page_container' data-page=131>

selection of products, some…
Post - reading :(11 )’

- Have ps play role as the residents on the tran
phu street to discuss about the shopping mall.
Eg: p1: Have you ever been to the new

shopping mall.

P2: No, I haven’t.

P3: I’ve been there twice…
P1: what are the prices in …

P2: Oh, the prices are cheaper than at the
small near by.

-OR have one pupil translate the text into
vietnamese.

c.consolidation:(5 )’

-remind main knowledge today
d.Homework:(3 )’

- Learn the new words by heart.

- Do exercises in work book (on pages 45+
46 ).

- Prepare the new lesson : “write “ for the next
lesson.

- Play role as the residents in
groups.

- translate the text into
Vietnamese

-remind and take note

- Do at home

Date of planing : 18 / 11 / 10 Date of teaching:25.11.2012 class8a
26.11.2012 class8b

26.11.2012 class8c

Period : 42 - UNIT 7 : WRITE

1.Aims

a.Knowledge:

-After finishing this lesson ps can know how to write the notice
b.Skills:

help ps to improve their writing skill.

</div>
(132)<div class='page_container' data-page=132>

- Help ps to love learning English

2.preparation: 
a.Tt: Lesson plan, teacher’s book, student’s book.

b.Ss: Learning the old lesson, preparing for the new one, student’s book.
3.procedure:

a.check old lesson(5 )’
* question

?/put the verbs in the black in correct tense
a. p1:you (know) a young man called Tom ?
p2: yes, I have

p1: How long you (know) Tom ?
p2: for a long time

* answer:

p1: have you known
p1:have you known

b.new lesson:

Stage * warm-up(5’)

-Have ps play a game called hang man.

-Ask ps to find the word notice by guessing the
letters.

(The word has 6 letters).

pre-writing(10 )’

-Have ps write the new words in the books
+effect (n,v)

+hard ware store: cửa hàng đồ ngũ kim
+contact sb: liên hệ, liên lạc với

 A new mall was built on tran phu strect.
The residents in the area have different ideas
about it. They infrom to hold a meeting.
-Ask ps to read the notice and answer t’s
questions.

?/ Who hold the meeting?

?/ What do they hold the meeting for?
?/ When is the meeting?

?/ Where is the meeting?

?/ Who can they contact for more information?
- Have ps work in pairs and answer these
questions.

While – writing(10’)

- Give ps some main reasons before writing.
+ Who writes the notice?

+ What’s the reason?

+ Where/ When is it taken place?
+ Who can they contact?

- Ask ps to read the second situation.
-Ask ps to work individually

-Have 2 pupils write the notice on the B.B
-T corrects their mistakes and ask ps to correct.
The school E speaking club holding a speaking
contest to celebrate the teacher’s day.

Date:November 15

Time:from 7 p.m to 10 p.m

- play a game in 2 teams

- Listen to T

- read the notice and answer
t’s questions.

- work in pairs and answer
these questions.

- Listen to T

- read the second situation
-Work in dividually and
exchange with others

</div>
(133)<div class='page_container' data-page=133>

Place :Hall 204 building G

Please contest Tran Thi Thu Hang of class 8H at
the above adress for more information

Post-writing(10 )’

-Ask ps to write a notice about the sport and
outdoor activities of class on the weekend.
-Ask ps to stick the poster of class on the B.B
The school sport club of class 8A holding a
badminton tournament.

Team:group A against group B
Date : December 28

Time : from 2p.m to 4p.m
Place: school sport ground

Please contact Ngo son Ha,the monitor,for more
information.

c.consolidation:(3’)

-remind main knowledge today lesson and ask Ss
write down note book

d. Homework:(2 )’

-write 2 notice posters at home

-prepare language focus for the next lesson

-write in dividually

-stick the poster on the B.B

- write down note book
- Do at home

Date of planing : 25 / 11 / 10 Date of teaching:1.12.2012 class8a
30.11.2012 class8b

</div>
(134)<div class='page_container' data-page=134>

Period : 43 - UNIT 7 :

Language focus

1.Aims

a.Knowledge:

-After finishing this lesson ps can revise and consolidate the grammar :The similar, the
present perfect tense.

- Help ps to do the exercises after revising the grammar.
c.Attitue:

- Help ps to love learning English and have good exercise doing skill.

2.preparation: 
a.Tt: Lesson plan, teacher’s book, student’s book.

b.Ss: Learning the old lesson, preparing for the new one, student’s book.
3.procedure:

a.Check old lesson:(5 )’
*.question:

? / HÃy phân biệt sự khác nhau giữa thì HTHT và thì QKĐ
*.answer

-Thỡ HTHT dt 1 hành động xảy ra trong qk nhng kết quả và hành động cha chấm dứt trong QK
và cịn kéo dài đến HT

- Th× HTHT dïng víi mét sè tr¹ng tõ nh : ever, never, lately, by now…. Vµ giíi tõ : since, for.
b.New lesson:

Stage * warm-up

Exercise 1(page 69)(7 )’

-Have ps revise the usage of present perfect
tense.

- Have ps play game to find the pairs of
words .which team is the winner ?

be-been 
 go -gone
 live-lived
 eat -eaten
 attend-attended
 see -seen 
 do -done
 write -written
 work - worked 
 collect -collected

Exercise 2 (page 69)(7 )’

- Have ps repeat the meaning of since and for .
- Have ps work in groups

- Have 2 pupils presented for the 2 groups to
write the answers on the B.B

for 5 minutes

since January
 since 1990 
 since the summer
 for 3 hours

for 10 weeks
 since Friday
 for 20 years

Exercise 3 (page 69)(7 )’
-Have ps work individually

-revise the present perfect
-play game

-correct

-repeat the meaning of since and
for

</div>
(135)<div class='page_container' data-page=135>

-Have them compare the result with others
_Ask ps to play game lucky numbers the ps
are divided into 2 groups.

1. 2 .3 .4 .5 .6 .7 .8
c a d f e b

-Have ps in each groups do the sentence they
choose

*.notice ps the way of pronunciation:have/has

b.haven t eaten’

c.haven t seen’

d. have attended
 e. has worked
 f.has collected

Exercise 4 (page 69)(7 )’

-Ask ps to practise the pr.perfect tens and
other tense in the cowersation

-Have ps workindividually

-Have ps write the answer on the B.B and
explain “why”

-Have ps practise reading the coversarion after
completing the coversation:

- Check ps’s answers and correct.
1. have …..been

2. hope

3. have lived

4. is

5. want

6. looks

7. have been

8. have

Exercise 5 (page 70)(7 )’

-Ask ps to repeat the usage of the comparision
-Ask ps to look at the pictures and complete
the sentences by using one word in the box.
-Have ps write their answer on the B.B
- Give the feedback

c. different from /not as/so cheap as
 d.. the same as

e.as cheap /expensive as
 f.different from

g.as long as

h.not as modern as
 i.not as /so cheap as
c.consolidation:(3’)

-remind main knowledge today lesson and ask
Ss write down note book

d. Homework(2 )’

- Rewrite the exercises in work book
/notebook

- Do exercises 6+7 in Exercise book on page
46-47.

-work individually
-compare

-play game lucky numbers

-do on the B.B
-take notes

-practise the pre.p and other
-work individually

- practise reading

- correct and copy into notebooks

- repeat the usage of the
comparisin

- look at the pictures andcomplete

the sentences.

- Write their answers
-correct their mistakes

- write down note book

-take notes

</div>
(136)<div class='page_container' data-page=136>

Date of planing : 25 / 11 / 10 Date of teaching:2.12.2012 class8a
30.11.2012 class8b

2.12.2012 class8c

UNIT 8 :

COUNTRY LIFE AND CITY LIFE

Period : 44 Getting started + listen and read

1.Aims

a.Knowledge:

- After finishing this lesson ps can talk about the differences between two places and
more over ps can talk about the change of some places.

b.Skills:

- Help ps to improve their speaking, listening and reading skills.

- Vocabularies: medical facilities, accessible, permanently,remote control
c.Attitue:

- Help ps to love learning English andlove the country.

2.preparation: 
a.Tt: Lesson plan, teacher’s book, student’s book, tape, picture.

b.Ss: Learning the old lesson, preparing for the new one, student’s book, notebook
3.procedure:

a.Check old lesson(5 )’
*.question:

? / put the verbs in correcttense.
a/ It (start) raining an hour ago.
b/ I(know) Lan for some months.
*.answer

a/ Started.
b/ have known.
b.new lesson:
* warm-up(5’)
- Introduction:

- Introduce the topic of this unit by using the
elicit describing sentences.

=> you live in the city/town. Have you ever

been to the country/city ?

?/ When did you go ?

- Now look at the words in the box, make a list

- listen to T.

</div>
(137)<div class='page_container' data-page=137>

of the differences between the city or town and
the countryside.

- Have ps give the answers: using the box.
+ peaceful

+ fresh air
+ quiet.

1. New words.(7 )’

- Have ps listen to the tape once fist.
- remote

- medical facilites
- permanently

2. getting started(8 )’

?/ what does Na think about the countrgside
now ? thirt of give things Na will talk about.
- Have ps work 5 sentences.

3. Listen and read(11 )’

- Have ps listen to the tape and check their
guessing sentences and compare with others in
groups.

- peaceful
- wide road
- beautiful house
- clean air

- Have ps read the dialogue in pairs.

- Let ps listen to the tape and underline the
present continuous sentences.

+ things are changing in the country now.
+ Remote areas are getting electricity

+ notice ps the use of present continuons tense.
- Ask ps to read the questions from a to f on
page 73.

- Have them read the dialogue once again and
practice asking and answering the questions in
pairs.

- Have some pairs practice asking and
answering before the class.

a/ Na has been to the countryside (to KL
village).

b/ She was there for the weekend .

c/ the countryside is peaceful and quiet and
there’s nothing to do.

d/ that means there are no libraries, no movies,
no super markets, no zoos to go.

e/ Mary remote areas are getting electricity.
People can now have…..

f/ I like country life become it is
I like city life because…

- Have ps use 2 verbs: get and become to speak
about the changing.

Eg: Life in the countryside is getting better.
c.consolidation(7 )’

- Have ps work in 2 groups to write out the
differences between city life and country life.
d.Homework:(2 )’

- learn by heart the dialogue.

- write the answers in to notebooks.

- prepare speaking part for the next lesson.

- listen to the tape

- ans wer the present.
- write 5 sentences.
- listen to the tape.

- practice speaking/ reading before
the class.

- Listen to the tape and underline.
- take notes

- read the qs from a to f.
- work in pairs.

- practice before the class in pairs.

- speak about the change by using
2 verbs.

</div>
(138)<div class='page_container' data-page=138>

Date of planing : 25 / 11 / 10 Date of teaching:2.12.2012 class8a
3.12.2012 class8b

3.12.2012 class8c

Period : 45. UNIT 8.

Speak-

listen

1.Aims

a.Knowledge:

- After finishing this lesson ps can speak about the differences between 2 pictures,
and ps can talk about the changes in the hometown by using become /get.

- After finishing this lesson ps can complete the dialogue after listening to the tape.
 b.skills:

- Help ps to improve their speaking skill.

- Help ps to improve their listening skill.
 c. attitue:

- Help ps to speak easily. Ps can understand more about the changes in MC town.
2.preparation:

a.Tt: Lesson plan, teacher’s book, pictures.

b.Ss: Learning the old lesson, preparing for the new, notebook
3.procedure:

a.Check old lesson(5 )’
*.question:

? /Make a sentence using “not only .. but also”.

*.answer:

Ps’ answer for example

- He is not only elever but also skilful.
b.new lesson:

Stage * warm-up(5 )’
- Introduction:

-Have ps play game: finding friends.
-Ask ps to choose the noun in

column B to combine with adjectives
in column A.

A. B.
Green city
Busy house
Tall park
Beautiful building
Modern trees
Noisy streets
Dirty road

Expensive transportation
Wide things

Clean traffic

-Have ps work in pairs and compare
the result with a partner

- T give the correct answer after
checking with the whole class
+ busy traffic

+ modern houses/ tranportation
+tall trees / building

- Play game: finding friends

- Look at the words on the board and
choose the noun in column B to
combine with adjectives in column A.

- Work in pairs and compare the result
with a partner

</div>
(139)<div class='page_container' data-page=139>

+ beautiful park / streets
+ dirty streets

+ wide road

+ expensive things
+ clean streets.
1. Speaking(15 )’

Pre- speaking

- Ask ps to observe the pictures the
same as ones on page 73.

- Have ps describe the picture A (5
years ago) and picture B (now)
- Ask ps to work in pairs and practise
speakingsentences using get /

become.

- Have ps read in chorus the
sentences

Eg : The town is become wider.
The town is getting more
beautiful.

- Have some ps read those before the
class

While - speaking

- Have ps speak their answer.T write
them on the board

- Ask the other ps to speak aloud
these sentences

a. The traffic is getting busier.
b. There are more tall trees, houses

and buildings

c. The houses are getting more
modern.

d. The city is becoming more
beautiful.

e. The streets are becoming clearner/
noisier/ wider

-Have ps give further information
about the changes

- Have ps practise in pairs to play
role to make a conversation

Eg:Nam an oversea Vietnamese and
the whole class.

S1: You have been away from MC
for ages, haven’t you?

Nam: Oh, yes, over 5 years. I visited
MC 5 years ago . Things are

changing now.

S2: What do you think of the streets
in MC now?

Nam: Oh, they are becomng larger,
cleaner and more beautiful.

S3: What about the traffic?
Nam: It is busier

- Have ps speak the same dialogues.

- Observe the pictures the same as
ones on page 73.

- Describe the picture A (5 years ago)
and picture B (now)

- Practice speaking before the class.
- Listen to them.

- Take notes

-Do as T asks

- Work in pairs.

</div>
(140)<div class='page_container' data-page=140>

Post - speaking

-have ps talk about the changes in
MC or in our province.

</div>
(141)<div class='page_container' data-page=141>

2.listening(15 )’

pre-listening

-hang the picture ob the B.B and give
the situation.

-this is lan and this is aunt hang .lan
is in HN. Aunt Hang is in Hue .Aunt
Hang is telephoning lan.Now guess
the content

What are they talking about ?
While-listening

-Let ps listen to the tape for the first
time

-Ask ps to check the information they
hear

-Have ps listen to the tape for the 2
time and fill the words they hear
-Have ps listen to the tape and check
the result with others

-Have ps write the answers on the B.B
let ps listen to the tape once again and
correct the result

1.that
9.Thursday

2.this 10.late
2. It’s 11.

afternoon

3. where 12. speak
4. from 13. my
5. coming 14. get
6. week

7. arriving

-Have ps listen to the tape for the last
time

Post- listening

-Ask ps repeat the conversation after
the tape

-have ps work in paris toread the
conversation

-Ask ps to work in groups to retell the
content

of the conversation
c.Consolidation:(3 )’

-remind main knowledge today lesson
-Ask Ss take notes

d.Homework:(2 )’

-Have ps learn by heart he
conversation

-Do the execrise in work book page
50,51

-Prepare reading part for the next
listen .

-guess the letters
-answer

-guess the content of the dialogue
-listen to the tape for the first time
-check the information

-listen to the second time and fill the
information individually

-compare the result with a partner
write on the B.B

-listen to the tape sentence by sentence
and correct the result

-repeat after the tape
-work in pairs

-retell the content in groups

-Listen
-take notes

-do at home

</div>
(142)<div class='page_container' data-page=142>

6.12.2012 class8c

Period : 46 UNIT 8.

read

1.Aims

a.Knowledge:

-After fineshing this lesson ps can understand the content of the text and complete
the summary and find the words that have same meaning

+rural area. +strain
+traditional +supply
+well -paying Job +result
+Typhoon +tragedy
+flood +live apart
+drought +urban area
+increase +provide st for sb
+overcrowding

b.Skills:

-Help ps to improve their reading skill
c. attitue

-Help ps to the be a ware of the overcrowding problem and know about
traditional way of life.

2.preparation: 
a.Tt: Lesson plan, teacher’s book, pictures, tape and cassette.

b.Ss: Learning the old lesson, preparing for the new, notebook
3.procedure:

a. Check old lesson
*.question

?/ make 3 sentence with ‘ not only …but also’
*.answer

Eg. He is not only intelligent but also helpful.
 b.new lesson:

stage * warm-up
- Introduction:

? Do you want to live in the city ?
? do you want to live in the country?
Why ? why not ?

? what problem may arise when so many
people move to the city ?

pre-reading
1.New words

-Have ps read the text once and find the
new words.

-rural area=in the countryside
-strain

-increase=arise
-migrant (n) d©n di c
-typhoon(n) b·o= storm
flood

-drought:

-provide st for sb =provide sb with st
? Have ps read agter T twice

-Have ps guess the content of the text

? why do so many people want to move to te

-answer some questions

overcrowded, pollution ,strain
social service

-read and find the new words

-read after T

</div>
(143)<div class='page_container' data-page=143>

city ?

? what will happen when so many people
move to the city ?

While-reading

-Have ps read the whole text and get the
main ideas individually

-Ask ps to read the summary and find the
missing words from the text

-Have ps give the answer byfore the class
-Ask ps to check the answers by finding the
information in the text

2. Complete the summary
1. leaving 6. problems
2. home 7.schools
3. city 8. hospitals
4. rural 9.problem
5. city 10.world

-Have ps read the text again to find out the

words that have he same meanings as ones
in exercise 2 page 75

-Have ps work in pairs

-Have some ps give the answer
3. The words that mean

a. rural
b. plentiful
c. in crease
d. strain
e.tragedy
f.urban

post-reading

-Have ps translate the text into vietnamese
before the class

d.Homework:

-Have ps learn by heart the new words
-do exercise page 52 in work book
--prepare writing part for the text lesson

-answer T’s question

-read the text and get main
ideas

-read the summary carefully
and fill in the blank with one
suitable word

- give the answer byfore the
class

- check and correct

-read again and do as teacher
guider

-work in pairs

-translate the text into viet
namese

-do a home

**********************************************************************
Date of planing : 2 / 12 / 10 Date of teaching:8.12.2012 class8a
7.12.2012 class8b

6.12.2012 class8c

Period : 47 UNIT 8.

write

1.Aims

a.Knowledge:

-Help ps to write a letter to a friend by asking the question and answering these ps so ps 
can write a meaningful completed letter

b.skills:

</div>
(144)<div class='page_container' data-page=144>

c. attitue

- Help ps to practise and have the habit to write letters to others

2.preparation: 
a.Tt: Lesson plan, teacher’s book, student's book.

b.Ss: Learning the old lesson, preparing for the new, notebook
3.procedure:

a. Check old lesson (5 ) ’
*question

? put these words in 3 groups: town, coutry
and both.

-hill,wooks,trafficlight ,bridge, ,carpark

village, moyntauns, cottage, river farm,tallbuiding, fresh air ,bank

*answer.

Town country both
Trafficlighht hill,farm bridge
Tall building mountains lake,river
Polluion fresh air bank
 b.new lesson:

Stage * warm-up.(5 )’
-Introduction:

? How often do you write a letter to your friends?
? Who can tell me how many parts of it ?

Pre –writing(10 )’

-Ask ps to work individually to rearrange the exercise 
1 page 76 in correct order

-Have ps work in pairs to compare with a partner
-Have ps give the answer and check

heading 
writes address
date

opening 
 body of letter
 closing

While- writing(12 )’

-Ask ps to work in goups to ask and answer the
question page 76

-Have some pairs practise asking and answering these
qs before the class

-Ask ps to work in 4 groups to write the whole letter
basing on their answer

-Have four pupils write their answer on the B.B
-T correct and give a model letter

(address………….)
(date ………..)
Dear lan,

I live in small town .my family has a large house with
alot of rooms .my sister and I share one bed room .It’s
lots of fun .Ontside my window is a small yard with
tress ,flowers. We live near school, so I can walk to
school

In my neighborhoud there is a swimming
Pool and a beautiful park.On the weeken I go

swimming or fishing with my friends in the lake near
my house. But the thing I like best in my neighborhood

is the library near my school. ThereI can't only study ,

-Answer the T's
questions

- work individually to
rearrange the exercise 1
page 76 in correct order
- work in pairs to

compare with a partner
- give the answer and
check

- work in goups to ask
and answer the question
page 76

- some pairs practise
asking and answering
these qs before the class
-work in 4 groups to
write the whole letter
basing on their answer
- Copy the model letter
-Work in 4group

</div>
(145)<div class='page_container' data-page=145>

read books but also watch video and learn how to use
the computer.

Do you have a library like that in your neighborhood ?
Is there anything interesting where you live ? write to
me

I'd like to say good bye now. I'm looking forward to
hearing from you soon.

Sincerely,

Post- writing(8 )’

- have some letter of pscorrected on the B.
c.Consolidation:(3 )’

-remind main knowledge today lesson

d.Homework.(2 )

’

- Ask pslearn the formation of a letter
- Do exercises in work book.

- Prepare language focus for the next lesson

- Copy the model letter
-Listen and take notes

- Do at home.

**********************************************************************
Date of planing : 2 / 12 / 10 Date of teaching:8.12.2012 class8a

7.12.2012 class8b
6.12.2012 class8c

Period : 48 UNIT 8.

language focus

1.Aims

a.Knowledge:

-Help ps to revise and improve their knowledge about vocabulary, grammar structures 
especially the present progressive to talk about the future and show the changes with the verbs
get and become

b.Skills:

+ Read - improve reading skill and make the similar dialogues.
+ Complete the dialogues with the present progressive tense.
+ Complete the sentences

+ Make the comparisions between the city and the country and between the three
advertisements.

c.Attitue

- Help ps to love learning English

2.preparation: 
a.Tt: Lesson plan, teacher’s book, student's book.

b.Ss: Learning the old lesson, preparing for the new, notebook
3.procedure:

a. check old lesson ( 5')
 *question

?/ Give a sententce using the structure of comparision

*answer.
St's answer
 b.new lesson:

stage * warm-up.(5’)
- Introduction:

</div>
(146)<div class='page_container' data-page=146>

usage of present progressive
tense to talk about future and
changes with get and become.
Now open your book

1. Exercise 1 (on page 77). (6’)
-Ask ps to read the dialogue and
underline the verbs in present
tense to talk about the future.
-Have ps repeat the usage of
verbs in 2 dialogues

Eg: leaving / arriving

-Have ps read the information in
the table and work in pairs by

replacing the new informtions
from the table to make the
similar dialogues, for example
Eg: A: Is the boat to Nha Trang
leaving at 11.40 ?

B: Is that / Are you talking 
about City of Hue ?

A: Yes/ That's right.

B: It's arriving on time, sir.
2. Exercise 2 (on page 78)
-Have ps work individually to
complete the dialogue and

compare the result with a partner.
-Have ps practise before the
class (6 pairs)

-Check and correct their answer
a. am playing

b.are doing
c. am watching
d. am listening
e. are cleaning
f. am having

3. Exercise 3 (on page 78) (6’)

-Ask ps to use the verbs in the
box to complete the sentences
-Have ps work individually and
comparethe result with a partner
-Have ps read their sentences
before the class

-Check and correct

a. The boys are getting taller
b. The old man are getting weak
c. We should go home. It's
getting dark

d. The weather is getting cold
e. The students are becoming
better

f. The cshool yard is becoming
clearner

4. Exercise 4 ( on page 79) (6’)
--Have ps work in pairs to make
comparisons between the city
and the country.

-Have 4 ps write their sentences
on the board

-Listen to T

- Read the dialogue and underline the
verbs in present tense to talk about the
future.

- repeat the usage of verbs in 2 dialogues
- read the information in the table and
work in pairs by replacing the new
informtions from the table to make the
similar dialogues

- Work individually to complete the
dialogue and compare the result with a
partner.

-Copy the answer into notebooks

- Work individually to complete the
dialogue and compare the result with a
partner.

- Read their sentences before the class
- Copy the answer into notebooks

- Work in pairs to make comparisons
between the city and the country.

- 4 ps write their sentences on the board
-Chek and copy

</div>
(147)<div class='page_container' data-page=147>

-Chek and correct

a. Food int he countryside is
fresher than in the city.

b. Traffic in the countryside is
not as busy as in the city.

c. Medical facilities in the city
are more accessible than in the
coutryside.

5. Exercise 5 ( on page 79)(6’)
-Have ps look at these

advertisements and compare
house, villa and apartment
-Ask ps to use the words in the
box and make comparisons

Eg: The house is more expensive
than the apartment.

The aprtment is smaller than
the villa

...

c.Consolidation (3’)

-remind main knowledge today
lesson

-Ask Ss write down note book
d.Homework.2'

-Have ps revise the old lesson
carefully

-Do exercises in their work books
-Prepare the old grammar from
unit 7 to unit 8.

- Use the words in the box and make
comparisons

-listen
-Take notes

- Do at home

***********************************************************************
Date of planing : 2 / 12 / 11 Date of teaching:6.12.2012 class8C
7.12.2012 class8A,B

7.12.2012 class8D,E
 Period : 50

rivsion

1.Aims

a.Knowledge:
-Grammar :

+ Present Simple
+ Past simple

b.Skills

-Develope speaking, reading and writing skills
c.Attitue

- Help ps to love learning English
2.preparation:

a.Tt: Lesson plan, teacher’s book, student's book.

b.Ss: Learning the old lesson, preparing for the new, notebook
3.Procedures :

</div>
(148)<div class='page_container' data-page=148>

?/ Give a sententce using the structure of comparision

*answer.
St's answer

* Introduction :

Today we ‘ll remind all Knowledge have you learn

b.new lesson:
*.Warm up :(5’)

-Has Ss answer some questions
a.Do you like milk?

b.Did you eat noodles for lunch?

c.Which subject did you have yesterday?
d.When do you do your homework?
-Calls on Ss answer aloud

-Gives feedback
1. Practice :

-Lets Ss remind the structures of the tenses and
their use

-Has them look at the extraboard and notice the
structures

-Explains how to do exercise

I . Complete the sentences with the suitable 
words or phrases in the bracket:(15’ )

1. Tom is not here . He ……….. to work . ( has
gone / went / goes / have gone )

2. I can not find my bike . I think someone ………
it . ( stole/ has stolen /has stole/ has stealed )
3. What time………your homework ? ( have you

finished / did you finished / did you finish / have
you finish )

4. How long …….. from her? ( have not heared /
have not heard / did not you hear / you have not
heard )

5. The hens ……….4 eggs this weeks . ( have
lied / have lay / have lain / have laid )

6. I ……… Peter for a long time . ( knew /
has known / have known / know )

7. I ………….. learning English three years ago .
( started / have started / start / was starting)

8. The moon……….. around the Earth . ( goes /
went / is going / go )

-Asks Ss to do the task

-Lets them compare with a parner
-Calls on some Ss give their result
-Checks and gives feedback

-Explains how to do exercise

-Listen to the teacher

-Answer the questions in front of the

class

-Remind and talk aloud

-Look at the board and take notes
-Listen and take notes

-Work in individual
-Pair work

-Talk aloud

</div>
(149)<div class='page_container' data-page=149>

II . Read the passage carefully , then answer the
questions below . (15’)

Chiang Mai is a city in Thailand that has a
wonderful night market . In the evening , the main
street is lined with small stands and shops that sell
almost anything you can imagine . Some stands
sell jewelry or clothing , others sell traditional Thai
crafts and still others sell fresh fruit and species . It
is easy to spend an entire evening just looking at
everything . If you decide to buy something , you
will not be disappointed The prices are very

reasonable . There are a lot of wonderful

attractions in Chiang Mai , but the night market is
a favorite for many people .

*Questions :

1. Where is Chiang Mai ?

2. What is Chiang Mai famous for ?

3. What can you buy in some stands in Chiang Mai
?

4. Are the prices expensive
-Asks Ss to do the task

-Calls on some groups give their result
-Checks and gives feedback.

-Work in group and write on their
extraboard

-Stick their answer on the board
-Listen and take notes

c.Consolidation:(3’)

-remind main knowledge today lesson
-Ask Ss write down note book

d.Homework(2’ )

- preparing carefully for the next lesson and the first term test.
- Do exercises in the grammar

***********************************************************************
Date of planing : 2 / 12 / 11 Date of teaching:8.12.2012 class8B,C
9.12.2012 class8D,E,A

Period : 51

rivision

(cont)

1.Aims

a.Knowledge:

- In order to prepare carefully for the first term test.Help ps to recall the old grammar 
structures and vocabulary.

+ S + be + adj + enough + to do st.
+ Advice : S1 + Said S2 Should do st.

S1 + advise S2 to do st.

S1 ask/ told S2 to do st.  indirected speech
+ S + have/ has + pII

+ S + be + ved (pII)
+ Gerund

</div>
(150)<div class='page_container' data-page=150>

b.Skill:

- Improve ps doing test skill 
c. Attitue

have ps justify their skiabi lity themuselves.

2.preparation: 
a.Tt: Lesson plan, teacher’s book, student's book.

b.Ss: Learning the old lesson, preparing for the new, notebook
3.procedure:

a.check old lesson(5’ ) 
*. questions:

-put the verbs in correct tunse.

a/ It is difficult (train) a horse (jump)
b/ they start (ask) you (stop).

c/ we (go)to a concert tonight. It (begin) at 7.30.
d/ they (build ) this school 2 years ago.

e/ He (walk) for 20 minutes.
*. answer.

a/ to train / to jump.
b/ asking / to stop.
c/ are going to / starts.
d/ built

e/ has walked.

* Introduction :

Today we ‘ll remind all Knowledge have you learn

b.Newlesson
* Warm up:

1.Grammar revision.(5’)

- Have ps repeat the use of enough and its structuce.
- Ask ps to make sentences.

Eg: She is intelligent enough to solve this exercise.
2. Reported speech.(5’)

- Have ps repeat the use and the way of changing
sentences into advice, demand indi rected speach .
- Have ps give examples.

3. Exercise

- Rewrite the sentences (that have the same
meaning ).

a/ Tom is a hand working student.
-> Tom ....

b/John said to me : "Please wait fir me outside my
office ".

-> John

c/ Peter and Mark are excellent
football players.

-> Peter

d/ Miss Jack son said to me " Can you give this
package to Jim when I leave

-> Miss Jackson told me....

e/ these students run very fast. you can't catch up
With.

-> You....

f/ I learn E sothat I can communicate with foreigners.
-> I learn E so as....

g/ " I don't behave very well in front of a crowd " said
peter.

- repeat the use of enough.
S + be + adj + enough + to ing
- make sentences.

- repeat

S1 said S2 should do st.
S1 asked S2 to do st.
- do the exercises

</div>
(151)<div class='page_container' data-page=151>

-> Peter

h/ She is a good E speaker.
-> she speaks

i/ the water is too cold for me to swim in.
-> the water...

J/ He speaks E clearly and and he gets 10p
-> He speaks...

K/ You should not talk in class while the teacher is
explaining the lesson.

-> Tom advised me ....
-> Tom asked me ....

-Ask Ss compare the resunt with their frien
-Call onSs ansewr correcte

- give fee back

- compare the resunt with their
frien

- ansewr

-Take notes
-

c.Consolidation(3’)

-remind main knowledge today lesson
-Ask Ss write down note book

d.Homework(2’ )

- preparing carefully for the next lesson and the first term test.
- Do exercises in the grammar.

***********************************************************************
Date of planing : 10 / 12 / 11 Date of teaching:15.12.2012 class8a
14.12.2012 class8b

13.12.2012 class8c

Period : 52

rivision

(cont)
1.Aims

a.knowledge:
-Grammar :
+ Used to

+ Modal : should

+ Commands, requests and advice in reported speech

+ Present tense with future meaning

+ Gerunds
b.skills

-Develope speaking, reading and writing skills
 c. attitue

- have ps justify their skiabi lity themuselves.

2.preparation: 
a.Tt: Lesson plan, teacher’s book, student's book.

b.Ss: Learning the old lesson, preparing for the new, notebook
3.Procedures :

a.Check old lesson (No)

</div>
(152)<div class='page_container' data-page=152>

Today we ‘ll remind all Knowledge have you learn

b.New lesson:
*.Warm up (4’)

-Lets Ss play “Slap the board”

love should enjoy
hate ask talk
say used to send
travel

-Calls on Ss play game
-Gives feedback

1. Practice (10’)

-Lets Ss remind the structures and their use
-Has them look at the extraboard and notice the
structures

I. used to :

S + used to + Vinf.

S + didnt + used to + Vinf.

II. Modal Should :

* Form : S + Should + infinitive

* Use : give advice

III.Commands , requests in reported speech :
* Form :

Example :

a. “ Can you give Tim this dictionary ?”
=> Mr Jackson askedme to give you this
dictionary

b. “ Please give Tim this dictionary . “
=> Miss Jackson toldme to give you this
dictionary

IV. Advice in reported speech:

* Form :

S + said ( that ) + S + should + V ...

Example : Miss Jackson said , “ Tim should work 
harder on his Spanish pronunciation.”

=> Miss Jackson said you shouldwork harder on

your Spanish pronunciation .

V.Gerunds :

+ V-ing

* Exercises :

-Explains how to do exercise

I. Use used to. to describe the 
changes (9’)

ex : She always gets up early in the morning.

She used to get up late 5 years ago.
1. There are so many tall buildings in the
centre now.

2. There is much more traffic now.

-Listen to the teacher

-Go on the board and play game

-Remind and talk aloud

-Look at the board and take notes

-Listen and take notes

-Work in group and write on their
love

like
hate
enjoy

S + asked / told+ O + to inf. 
something

</div>
(153)<div class='page_container' data-page=153>

3. People take holidays aboard these day.
4. People spend more money on entertainment
nowadays.

5. People don’t smoke a lot these days.
6. People do exercise regularly these days.
-Asks Ss to do the task

-Calls on some groups give their result
-Checks and gives feedback

-Guides Ss how to do exercise

II.Change these sentences into reported speech :
(8’)

1.”Please lend me your dictionary, Quang,” Hoa
said.

2.Minh said to her sister : “can you help me with
my homework?”

3.The teacher said : “You should practice speaking
English every day.”

4.Miss Jackson said to Mary : “Can you turn down
the radio?”

5.”You shouldn’t translate each sentence into
Vietnamese,” my brother told me.

-Asks Ss to do the task

-Calls on some groups give their result

-Checks and gives feedback

- Explains how to do exercise

III. Gerunds or infinitive ? (8)

1.Where do you want (go) …... ?
2.What have you decided (do) …....?

3.Don’t forget (send) …… me a postcard when
you’re on holiday.

4.You must stop (work)….. so hard.

5.I didn’t mind (travel) …....by train but I prefer
( fly)……..

6.I hate (get) …….. up early in the morning.
-Asks Ss to do the task

-Has Ss compare with their partner
-Calls on some Ss give their result
-Checks and gives feedback

extraboard

-Stick their sentences on the board
-Listen and take notes

-Listen and take notes

-Work in group and write on their
extraboard

-Stick their sentences on the board
-Listen and take notes

-Listen and take notes

-Work in individual
-Pair work

-Talk aloud

-Listen and take notes

c.Consolidation(3’)

-remind main knowledge today lesson
-Ask Ss write down note book

d.Homework :(2’)

</div>
(154)<div class='page_container' data-page=154>

******************************************************************

Date of planing : 10 / 12 / 11 Date of teaching:16.12.2012 class8B,C

14.12.2012 class8D,A,E
Period : 53

rivision

(conti)

1.Aims

a.Knowledge:

- In order to prepare carefully for the first term test.Help ps to recall the old grammar 
structures and vocabulary.

+ S + be + adj + enough + to do st.
+ Advice : S1 + Said S2 Should do st.

S1 + advise S2 to do st. indirected speech.
S1 ask/ told S2 to do st.

+ S + have/ has + pII.
+ S + be + ved (pII )
+ Gerund

+ present continuous tense talk about the future.
 b.Skills:

- Improve ps doing test skill 
 c. attitue

- have ps justify their skiabi lity themuselves.

2.preparation:

a.Tt: Lesson plan, teacher’s book, student's book.

b.Ss: Learning the old lesson, preparing for the new, notebook
3.procedure:

a.Check old lesson(5’)
. ques tions

put the verbs in correct tense

a. It is difficult (train) a horse (Jump)
b. They start (ask)you (stop)

c. we (go) to a concert tonight .It (begin) at 7.30
d.they (built) this school 2 years ago

e.He (walk) for 20 minutes
.answer

a/ to train / to Jump
b/ asking / to stop
c/ are going to /starts
d/ built

e/ has walked

* Introduction :1’

Today we ‘ll remind all Knowledge have you learn

b.new lesson:
* Warm up:

1.Grammar revision(9’)

-Have ps repeat the use of present perfect tense
and passive voice

-Have ps make sentence and structures
Eg .She has just finished her homework

</div>
(155)<div class='page_container' data-page=155>

S+have/has +PII+O/A

-have ps give examples as many as possible
-Have ps repeat the use of gerund verb and make
sentence

-Have them distinguish the differences of using
them

Eg.Doing morning exercise is good for our
health.

2.Exercise

-ask then to copy the exercise and to in the
notebook

+chữa lỗi sai trong các câu sau đây.(10)
a. lan and mai go to school on 7.

b. She has play the piano since 7.o'clock
c.She worked hardly albday.

d.She has worked for friday

e.all of them have been done their exercise.
f. one of us have to working .work hard helps
him get good grede

g.the test will do next week.

+chia động từ trong ngoặc . .(10’)
a. they hated (work) with children.
b. I (receive) her letter recently

c. She has (be) ill since last weekend
d.I am looking forward to (hear)from you
e. Do you like (play)soccer

f. How should you (learn)newwords?

g. Nam often (do)volunteer works on sundays
h. I am lucky enough (have)a friend like you.

-repeat the use of gerund verbs
- distinguish the differences

-copy the exercise and do them
- copy and do i the notebook

- do the requirement at home

c.Consolidation:(3’)

-remind main knowledge today lesson
-Ask Ss write down note book

d.Homework(2’)
-remind knowlege

Grammar :
+ Suggestion

+ Be going to
+ Modal verbs
+ Prepositions

****************************************************************

Date of planing : 2 / 12 / 11 Date of teaching:16.12.2012 class8AB
17.12.2012 class8C,D
17.12.2012 class8E

Period : 54

rivision

(conti)

1.Aims

a.Knowledge:

-Grammar :

</div>
(156)<div class='page_container' data-page=156>

+ Prepositions

b.Skills:

-Develope speaking, reading and writing skills

c. Attitue

-

have ps justify their skiabi lity themuselves.

2.preparation:

a.Tt: Lesson plan, teacher’s book, student's book.

b.Ss: Learning the old lesson, preparing for the new, notebook

3.Procedures :

a.Check old lesson(No)

* Introduction :1’

Today we ‘ll remind all Knowledge have you learn

b.New lesson:

1.Warm up :(4’)

-Lets Ss play “networks” to review some
prepositions

-Calls on Ss play game
-Gives feedback

2. Practice (5’)

-Lets Ss remind the structures and their use
-Has them look at the extraboard and notice the
structures

Prepositions

S+v+ Pre+advtime..

exercise

-Explains how to do exercise

I. Fill in the blanks with the approriate 
prepositions:(10’ )

1. What do you do ... Sunday?
2. I was born …..january 1st, 1965

3. It often rains ……October in Viet Nam.
4. What are you going to ….2004?

5. I don’t know but I am going to go to the
college ….... September this year.

6. She often hears some strange noise …
midnight.

Does it rain …….Spring?

-Listen to the teacher

-Go on the board and play game

-Remind and talk aloud

-Look at the board and take notes
-Listen and take notes

Prep.

at in

with

</div>
(157)<div class='page_container' data-page=157>

7. We must learn to behave…..the right way.
8. My mother is always proud…… my brother.
9. Could you turn ….. the light, please? It’s dark
in here.

10. I go to the market ………. order to buy some
food.

11.There is a plate …….... the table.
12.The cat is lying …………. the table.
13.The fruit is ………... the bowl.

14.The lighting – fixture is …..the table.
15.There is a big tree ………....of the house.
16.The table is …………. the couch and the
armchairs

17.The sink is ……... the stove.
-Asks Ss to do the task

-Lets them compare with a parner
-Calls on some Ss give their result
-Checks and gives feedback

-Lets Ss remind the structures and their use

Modal verbs : should / must / can

-Guides Ss how to do exercise

II .Choose the best answer :(10’)

1. She is not ….. to drive a car.

A.old enough B.enough old C.old

2. Mr Minh is strong enough ……. that big box.

A.to lift B.lift C.lifting

3. Lan has a lot of homework in Math. She … do
it tonight.

A. will be going to
B. going to

C. is going to

4. Is she going to ……….. you this summer?
A.to visit B.visit C.visited
5. She ………..here next year.

A.was B.is C.will be

6. She ………. badminton when she was at lower
secondary school but she doesn’t play now.
A.play B.plays C.played
7.Is 11 o’clock all right?

- ………..

A. yes, that’s fine.

B. No, I don’t want to go.
C. wait a minute

-Work in individual
-Pair work

-Talk aloud

-Listen and take notes

-Look at the board and take notes
-Listen and take notes

-Work in group

</div>
(158)<div class='page_container' data-page=158>

8. You …….... to go to the market yourself and
buy some food.

A.must B.should C.ought
9. ……….. you call aunt Chi, please?
A.Do B.Can C. Must

10.You must put all dangerous objects out of
children’s ……….

A.hard B.reach C.place
11.A: Can you help me with this exercise?
B : You must try to solve it …………..
A.yourself B.ourselves C.myself
-Asks Ss to do the task

-Calls on some Ss give their result
-Checks and gives feedback

-Explains how to do exercise

III . Read the passage carefully , then answer
the questions below . (10’)

It was the first lesson after the summer
holidays at a small school in England . The
lesson was about the seasons of the year . “ There
are four seasons in the year , “ said the teacher . “
They are Spring , Summer , Autumn and Winter .
In Spring it is warm and everything begins to
grow . In summer it is hot and there are many
flowers in the fields and gardens . In Autumn
there are many vegetables and much fruit .
Everybody likes to eat fruit . In summer it is cold
and it often rains . Sometimes there is snow on
the ground. “ Here the teacher stopped and

looked at one of the pupils , “ Stop talking , Tom ,
“ he said . “ Now listen to me . Can you tell us
when is the best time of apples ?”

“ Yes , sir ,” answered Tom . “ It is when the
farmer is not at home and there is not dog in the
garden.”

Questions :

1. Where did the lesson take place?
2. What was the lesson about?

3. What did the teacher ask Tom to do?
4. What was Tom’s answer?

-Asks Ss to do the task

-Calls on some groups give their result
-Checks and gives feedback

-Listen and take notes

-Work in group and write on their
extraboard

-Stick their answer on the board
-Listen and take notes

c.Consolidation:(3’)

-remind main knowledge today lesson
-Ask Ss write down note book

d.Homework(2’)
-prepare for the test

</div>
(159)<div class='page_container' data-page=159>

Thời gian thi có sự thay đổi do phịng ,trường chỉ đạo,

Date of planing : 2 / 12 / 11 Date of
teaching:9.12.2012 class8AB,C,D,E

Period : 55

THE FIRST EXAMINATION

1.Aims

By the end of lesson Ss can be remind all knownlege their have learn

2.preparation: 
a.Tt: the examination

b.Ss: paper,pen
1.Ma trận đề

Part/ Section/
Q. no.

Q. levels

Text types/ Materials/ Situations Language sub-skills

K
n
o C
o
m L
o
w

A Ap Hi

Language Focus
Q. 1
Q. 2

Q. 3
Q. 4
Q. 5
Q. 6
Q. 7
Q. 8
Q. 1
Q. 2
Q. 3
Q. 4
Q. 5
Q. 6
Q. 7
Q. 8

















Noun

Adverb of place
Verb( past simple)
intention

used to + V
verb phrase
ask s.o to do s.th
Verb (present perfect)
Yes-No question
advice
Wh-question
Yes-No question
Wh-question
Wh-question
Yes-No question
Wh-question

- a deaf- mute
- upstairs
- lived

- is going to see
-used to live
- learn by heart
- ask me to give
- has learnt
- Did
- should

- What
- May
- How
- What
- Did
- Why

No. of items: 16
Mark allocated: 4

10
2.5
6
1.5
Reading
comprehension
Q. 1
Q. 2
Q. 3
Q. 4





With the topic “Learning new
words”

</div>
(160)<div class='page_container' data-page=160>

No. of items: 4

Mark allocated: 2 42

Grammar
Q. 1
Q. 2
Q. 3
Q. 4
Q. 5
Q. 6
Q. 7
Q. 8








Past simple
Future simple
Present progressive
Present simple
Present progressive
Modal: must

Used to + v
Present simple

- wrote

- will buy
- are practicing
- reads

- is driving
- work
- used to cry
- rides

No. of items: 8

Mark allocated: 2 1.56 0.52

Writing
Q. 1
Q. 2
Q. 3
Q. 4




Reported speech
Reported speech
Reported speech
Reported speech

-Hoa asked me to
give..

- She asked me to
take..

-..Tam should practice
- ..asked me to give..
No. of items: 4

Mark allocated: 2

2
1

2
1
Total items: 32

Total marks: 10

16
4
12
4
2
1
2
1
2

.content of examination
PHONG GD - ĐT

Huyện Sông MÃ

§Ị KIĨM TRA HäC Kú I (2012 2012)
Môn tiêng Anh

Thời gian: 45phút
Name:...

Class:...

Mark:

I. Choose the best words by circling the letter A, B,C or D.(2 points)
1. A person who can not speak or hear is called _________.

A. a character B. a deaf C. a blind D. a deaf mute
2. I am living on the 2nd floor. Peter is living ________ on the 3rd floor.

A. downstairs B. upstairs C. outside D. inside
3. Hung ________ in Hue last year.

A. lives B. lived C. live D. is living

4. Nga has a movie ticket. She ___________ a movie.

A. see B. will see C. sees D. is going to see

5. When I was young, I used to ________ in Hue.

A. living B. lives C. lived D. live

</div>
(161)<div class='page_container' data-page=161>

A B
1. Did you help Ba draw this

picture?

2. Your speaking is bad.
3. What are your hobbies?
4. May I help you?

5. How should we learn words?

1...
2...
3...
4...
5...

A. You should speak English as much
as possible.

B. We should try different ways of
learning words.

C. No, he did it himself.

D. They are reading and swimming
E. No, thank you. Im fine.

III/ Read the passage carefully

Language learners learn words in different ways. Some learners make a list and put
into it the meanings of new words in their mother tongue, and try to learn them by heart.
However, others do not. Instead, they write one or two example sentences with each new word
in order to remember how to use the word in the right way.

There are also different ways of learning the same number of words. For example, if
you try to learn ten words in two days, you can do so in two ways. You can learn the first five
words the first day, and then learn the other five the next day. However, because revision is
nescessary, you can learn all the ten words the first day and revise them the next day. This
helps you practice the words more times.

Language learners should try different ways of learning words so as to find out the best way
for themselves.

a. Choose True (T) or False (F) statements ( 1m)

T F
1. All language learners write the meanings of new words in

their mother tongue.

2. Some learners write examples of words they want to
learn.

b. Answer the questions (1m)

1. Do learners learn words in the same way?
...

2. What is nescessary in learning words?
...

IV/. Give the correct forms of the verbs in brackets (2ms)

1. He ( write ) a letter for his friend last night.
2. My parents ( buy) a new house next week.
3. They ( practice ) . English pronunciation now
4. My father ( read ) newspaper every day.
5. Look! Dan Truong (drive) a new car.

V/ Rewite the following commands and requess in reported speech. (2ms)

1. Please give me my book , Lan ., said Hoa .
= > Hoa asked...

2. Please take me these books to my classroom.
=> She asked me..

3. You should practice speaking English every day ,
=> The teacher said Tam .

</div>
(162)<div class='page_container' data-page=162>

3.ĐáP áN Và BIểU ĐIểM

I .Choose the best words by circling the letter A, B,C or D.(2 points)
1.D 2.B 3.B 4.D 5.D

II. Match the sentences in column A with those in column B (2 pts)

1.C 2.A 3.D 4.E 5.B

III. Read the passage carefully 
a. Choose T or F ( 1m)

1. F 2. T

b. Answer the questions (1m)

1. No, they dont.

2. Revision is nescessary in learning words.

IV. Give the correct forms of the verbs in brackets (2 pts)

1.wrote 2.will buy 3.are practicing 4.reads
5.is driving

V . Rewite the following commands and requess in reported speech. (2ms)

1. Hoa asked Lan to give her her book.

2. She asked me to take her these books to her classroom.

3. The teacher said Tam should practice speaking English every day.

4. Mrs Jackson asked me to give you this dictionary.
d.Homework.

preparing for unit 9 "getting started + listen and read"

4.đánh giá nhận xét

...
...
...
...
...
...………

Date of preparing: 23/12/2012 Date of teaching: 26 / 12 /2012 class8A ,C
27/ 12/ 2012 class8B,,D

</div>
(163)<div class='page_container' data-page=163>

Period : 56 Unit 9 :

Afirst-aid course

getting started + listen and read

1.Aims

- By the end of the lesson Ss can express their promises with “will”, “would”, “can”, “could”
a.Knowledge:

- Vocabulary: bleed, sting, hit, fall off, concious, wound, put pressure on, tight, ambulance,
fall asleep, awake

b.Skill:

- Help ps to improve their listening, reading and speaking skills.
 c. attitue:

-Provide ps with understanding about first-aid so as to they can apply into real situations

they meet.

2.preparation: 
a.Tt: Lesson plan, teacher’s book, student's book, tape, picture

b.Ss: Learning the old lesson, preparing for the new, notebook
3.procedure:

a.Check old lesson: (5)
. Questions:

?/ Rewrite the sentence using "ask"

- Lan told her brother to help her with her homework.
. Answer.

Lan asked her brother to help her with her homework
* Introduction(1)

In our life, we are usually in the situations that require first-aid.
b. New lesson:

* Warm up:5’

- What can you do when you see a boy has a bad cut on his
leg?

...

Today we're going to learn something about first- aid.

- Ask ps to look at the picture and explain the usage of these
things such as bandage ice pack, alcohol...

- Have ps read four situations in the book on page 80 after
giving ps some new words

+ ointment, bandage, handkerchief, cotton balls, tiger baim,
ice bag...

- Have ps explain their idea to these situations "what they'd
do in these situations which require first - aid.

- A girl has a burn on her arm

(In this situation, I will put the burn under cold water and
wash it or put a cold handkerchief on it. Then I apply some
ointment and cover it with a sterile bandage )

- A boy has a bad cut on his leg.

( Firstly, I will wash the cut with alcohol to sterilze it and
then I cover it with a bandage. If the cut is really bad I will
take him to the nearest clinic.)

- A girl has a nose bleed.

(I will try to stop her nose bleeding by letting her stand
straight and raise herhead behind. The I cover the bleeding
nose with the cotton ball.)

- A boy has a bee sting.

(Firstly, I will wash the sting. Then I put some meat

- answer in vietnamese
1. Getting started.(10’)

- look at the picture and
listen to T.

- read the situations....
- explain before the class

</div>
(164)<div class='page_container' data-page=164>

tenderize on a handkerchief and then put the handkerchief on
a bite for a half an hour to ease the pain)

. New words.

- Have ps listen to the tape
- Have ps find the new words.
- T explains:

+ emergency
+ ambulance
+ fall off
+ hit

+ concious > < unconcious.
+ bleed

+ wound

+ put pressure on st.

- Have ps read new words after T twice
- Have them read aloud before the class

- Let ps listen to the tape for the whole conversation.
-Have ps read after the tape in chorus

-Have ps practise in pairs reading the conversation.
-Have ps practise in pairs (open pairs )

speaking aloud before the class

- Have ps select the topics covered in the dialogue (page 81)
- Have ps work in groups

-Ask ps to give the answers

-Have the whole class check and correct.

a. Describing the condition of the injured person
b. Asking for address

c. Asking about the condition of injured person

d. Giving first aid construction.
e. Arranging for an ambulance

- Have ps read again the conversation
-Let them listen to the tape once again

2.Listen and read(19p)
- listen to the tape.
- find the new words.
. New words.

+ emergency
+ ambulance
+ fall off
+ hit

+ concious > < unconcious.
+ bleed

+ wound

+ put pressure on st.
-read after twice
-read aloud
-listen to the tape
-read after the tape
-practice in pairs

-practice in pairs before the
class

-select the topics cover in the
dialogue

-work in groups
-give the answer
-check and correct

- read again

-listen to the tape again

c.Consolidation:(3p)

-remind main knowledge today lesson
d.Homework.(2 p)

-Learn the new words by heart

-Do execrises 1,2 on page Unit 9 in work book
prepage ' listen +speak 'for the next lesson

4. NHỮNG KINH NGHIỆM ĐƯỢC RÚT RA SAU KHI GIẢNG :

- Thời gian cho từng phần,tưng hoạt động:

………
……… --
Nội dung kiến thức :

</div>
(165)<div class='page_container' data-page=165>

- Phương pháp giảng dạy :

………

Date of preparing: 23/12/2012 Date of teaching: 27/ 12 /2012 class8c,b,a
29/ 12/ 2012 class8E ,D

Period : 57 Unit 9 :

Speak -listen

1.Aims

- After learning the lesson Ss will be able to make and respond to

offers, requests, and promises fluently by using modal verbs such as: can/ could,
will/ would.

a.Knowledge:
 -structure

+ Request: can/ could / will / would you...?
+ Offer : Would you like ...? Yes, please.
+ Promises : I'll .... I promise. -I hope so.
-Vocabulary:

wheelchair, stretcher , eye chart , crutches , scale
 b.Skll:

- Help ps to improve their speaking skills.

- Help ps to improve and practise their listening skill.

c.Attitue

-Provide ps with understanding about first-aid so as to they can apply into real situations
they meet.

- Help ps to distinguish the medical facilities, and the first aid they need when they meet
these situations

2.preparation: 
a.Tt: Lesson plan, teacher’s book, student's book, tape, picture

b.Ss: Learning the old lesson, preparing for the new, notebook
3.procedure:

a.Check old lesson: (5’)
. Questions:

? read the conversation page 80 flountly 
.answer

</div>
(166)<div class='page_container' data-page=166>

b. New lesson:
* Warm up:4’

-Have ps answer these sentence.

-Would you like me to go out with you ?
-Can you open the door ?

I promise I'll keep it secret .

? What kinds of sentence I've made ?
1.Speak(15’)

pre-speaking

-Have ps look atthe book page 81 and read then take turn to
make and respond to offers ,requests , promises.

-Have ps practice before the class in pairs (3pairs)
While-speaking

-Have ps look at their books and make three sentence about
using offers, requests and promises that pictures require
-Have ps work in groups of four .

-Have ps practice speaking before the class
* suggested answer:

b. A. Would you give me an aspirin, please?
B. All right.

c. A. Can you help me ?
B. What can I do for you ?

A. Will you take me to the hospital, please ?
B. OK

d. A. Would you like some mill ?
B. That would be nice.

e. A. I promise I won't do it again.
B. I hope so.

-Ask one pair to practice part a before the class and take
turn with the left ones

-Have 4 pairs practice making the same dialogues before
the class

Post-speaking

-Have ps practice some dialogue when they meet these
situations:

+A girl's bike is broken down /has a flat tire
+A boy has his nose bleed

2.Listen : (15’)

Pre - listening:

- Have ps look at the picture page 82 and read the words in
the box.

- Have ps call the name of objects in the pic

- Have ps match the picture with the words in the box.
- Check and correct the answers.

A. Ambulance.

B. wheelchair
C. Crutches
D. eye chart
E. Scale
F. Stretcher

- Asks ps to take notes, to write the meanings of the new
words

While - listening

- Have ps listen to the tape twice

-read aloud

-that would be nice
-allright

-T hope so

-offer ,request ,promise

-read and take turn to make
and respond to offers

-practice in pairs (3 pairs)
before the class

-Make sentence
-Work in groups

-Practice before the class
Practise in turn

-Practice the same dialogue
about picture b,c,d and e
-Practice before the class
-Oobserve the picture.

- Read the words in the box.
- Call the names of objects.
- Match the (picture) objects
with their names.

- Check and correct.

</div>
(167)<div class='page_container' data-page=167>

- Have ps put these objects in correct order.

- Have ps listen to the tape and cluck the order in groups.
- Have ps write them on the B.B.

- Ask ps to give the correct order after listening to the tape.
1.F 2.B 3.A 4.D 5.E 6.C

This is the emergency room in a large hospital. A parademic
is wheeling a patien on a strecher into the emergency room
where a doctor is waiting to treat the patient. The patient
doesn't look well . His head is bandaged and his eyes are
closed.

A nurse is pushing an empty wheelchair towards the exit.
She is probably taking it to the ambulance.

The eye chart on the wall is used to check people's eyesight.
The chart consists of about 28 letters ranging in side from
about 5 centimeters in height at the top of the chart to about
1 centimeters at the bottom.

A doctor is trying to weigh a crying baby on the scale. The
baby's mother is standing nearby. She is trying to stop her
child from crying.

The crutches, which are for S.O with a broken leg , are
leaning against the wall.

New words:

+ Emergency room: Phßng cÊp cøu
+ Paramedic:Phơ tá

+Check one's eyesight: Kiểm tra thị lc
Lean against :Dựa vào

Post - listening.

- Have ps listen to the tape and ask ps to repeat after the tape
some new words

- Listen to the tape twice.
- Put them in correct order.

- Listen and check in groups.
- Write on the B.B.

- Give correct order opten
listening to the tape.

- Repeat after the tape some
new words.

c.Consolidation:(3’)

-remind main knowledge today lesson
d.Homework.(2 ) ’

-learning the old lesson : vocabulary
-preparing for the next lesson : reading

4. NHỮNG KINH NGHIỆM ĐƯỢC RÚT RA SAU KHI GIẢNG :

- Thời gian cho từng phần,tưng hoạt động:

………
……… --
Nội dung kiến thức :

………
……….

- Phương pháp giảng dạy :

………
………

***********************************************************************
Date of preparing: 23/12/2012 Date of teaching: 29/ 12 /2012 class8B,C,A
30/ 12/ 2012 class8D,E

</div>
(168)<div class='page_container' data-page=168>

1.Aims

a.Knowledge:

- After finishing this lesson, ps can understand the text about case and first aid sothat ps can
ansuwer the questions from a to e.

+ vocabulary:

flat revive overheat.
force sb to do st. sterile elevete.
b.Skill:

- Im prove and help ps practice reading skill.
 c. attitue

- Educate ps the first aid they need to me in cases and make ps love learning this subject.
2.preparation:

a.Tt: Lesson plan, teacher’s book, student's book, tape + cassette
b.Ss: Learning the old lesson, preparing for the new, notebook

3.procedure:

a. check old lesson (5’)
Question

-? ViÕt tõ míi sau b»ng tiếng anh.

- ghế đẩy, nạng gỗ, xe đẩy, bảng khám thÞ.
Answer

- wheelchair, crutches , stretcher, eye chart.
* Introduction (1’)

?/ what can you do when you meet someone needs first aid for exanple fainting ...? now today
we're going to learn part reading page 83.

b.new lesson
* warm up()

Pre - reading.(10’)
- Ask ps to give the emrgencies they know

- Have ps discuss the cases need first aid for example
fainting, shock, burn.

- Have ps look at the book page 83 and listen to teacher's
explaination.

- Have ps listen to the tape one

While – reading (14’)

- Have ps look at the book and read the text in silence
and guess the new words' meaning.

+ elevate
+ revive
+ minimize

+ sterile dressing.

- Have ps read the new worde after T

- Have ps read the questions from a to e page 84.
- Ask ps to read the text again to find the answers.
- Have ps work in groups of eight to find the answers.
- Have ps write their answers in extra board.

- Ask ps to hang the bourds on the B.B
- Ask ps to give the information in the text.
- T corrects:

a/ A b/ B c/ A d/ C e/ A
post reading(10’)

- give the emrgencies.
- discuss with a partner.

- look at the book and listento T.
- lis ten to the tape once.

- read the text in slilence and
guess the new words' meaning.
- read the new words after
- read questions from a to e
- read the text again to find the
answer.

- work in groups.

- give the answers in extra bourd
- hang the boards on the B.B
- give the infor mation.

</div>
(169)<div class='page_container' data-page=169>

- Have ps read the text again aloud before the class.
- Ask ps to give first aid instructions about the heart at
tack case.

class.

- discuss and give first aid in
structions.

.
c.Consolidation:(3’)

-remind main knowledge today lesson
d. Homework:(2’ )

- Learn by heart the new words

- Read the text again

- Prepare part " write" on page 84 for the next lesson.

4. NHỮNG KINH NGHIỆM ĐƯỢC RÚT RA SAU KHI GIẢNG :

- Thời gian cho từng phần,tưng hoạt động:

………
……… --
Nội dung kiến thức :

………
……….

- Phương pháp giảng dạy :

………
………

*********************************************************************

Date of preparing: 1/1/2012 Date of teaching: 3/ 1 /2012 class8B,C,D,B
4/ 1/ 2012 class8A

4/ 1/ 2012 class8E
Period : 59 Unit 9:

write.

1.Aims

By the end of the lesson Ss will be able to
- Know how write a thank-you note (letter)

a.Knowledge:

+ vocabulary: - cheer sb up.
- contact.
+Grammar:

b.Skill:

- In order to help ps to practice their writing skill, especially about letter/ thank you note.
c. Attitue

- Educate ps the first aid they have the habit to write letters to friends.

2.preparation: 
a.Tt: Lesson plan, teacher’s book, student's book.

b.Ss: Learning the old lesson, preparing for the new, notebook...
3.procedure:

a. Check old lesson(5’) 
Question:

-? what would you do when you meet aperson who is fainting ?
.Answer.

</div>
(170)<div class='page_container' data-page=170>

- Lower his head below the level of the heart.

- Give him a cup of tea...

*Introduction :1’

Today we learn write a thank- you note
 b.New lesson

* warm up :(5’)

- Have ps play a game to find the word thank - you note.
?/ what does it mean ?

pre - writing:(8’)

- Have ps look at the part on page 84 and read the
requirement.

- Have ps read the letter and use the correct tense forms
of the verbs.

Ask ps to answer the questions:
?/ who writes the letter ?

?/ who is the receiver ?
?/ Is Nga bored ?

?/ How does Nga contact her friend ?

?/ How did Nga feel when she received the present ?
- Ask ps to work in pairs / groups to correet the verbs.

- Have ps to give the answers on the B.B

1. was 4. came
2. were 5. am

3. helped 6. will phone

while writing(10’)
- Have ps read the letter again.

- Ask ps to write a thank - you note to a friend. Invite
friend to go on a picnic with you. Arrange to contact
friend. Use the following questions to guide (on the page
84).

?/ What did your friend give you?
?/ On what occasion ?

?/ What was it/ were they like?
?/ ...

- Ask ps to read the questions aloud

- Have ps answer the - questions and write down as the
main informations of the letter.

- Have ps write in groups , groups 1 writes 2 sentences
basing on the letter page 84.

- Ask one representative from each gorup to write on the

B.B.

- T correct and help ps to write a complete letter.

Post – writing (12’)

-Have ps use the same format to write another letter to
another friend for another occasions

- Ask ps to work individually

-Have ps listen to the model letter of T Dear Lan,

Thank you very much for the book you sent me while I

- Play the game.
- Answer

- Look at part on page 84 and
read the requirement.

- Use the correct tense of the
verbs.

- Answer some questions.

- Work in groups.

- Give the answers on the B.B.

- Read the letter again.
- Do as the requirement.

-Read aloud.

-Answer the question and write a
letter (thank you note)

-Work in groups
- Write on the B.B

-Correct and write a model letter
- Use the same format to write
another letter to another friend
for another occasions

</div>
(171)<div class='page_container' data-page=171>

was staying with my grandparents in the countryside .
the book is really interesting and it helped to cheer me
up when I had no thing to do .I returned /came back
home on Sunday the 5th .Now I'd love to see you .Will
you come over my house on the Monday evening ?.

your friend ,
Hien

-T may ask ps to write a dictation if .
c.Consolidation:(3’)

-remind main knowledge today lesson
d. Homework(1 ) ’

-Have ps write a thank-you note to a friend

-Ask ps to prepare language focus for the text lesson.

4. NHỮNG KINH NGHIỆM ĐƯỢC RÚT RA SAU KHI GIẢNG :

- Thời gian cho từng phần,tưng hoạt động:

………
……… --
Nội dung kiến thức :

………
……….

- Phương pháp giảng dạy :

………
………

*************************************************************************
Date of preparing: 1/1/2012 Date of teaching: 5/ 1 /2012 class8B,C,D,B ,A,E
 Period : 60 Unit 9:

LANGUAGE FOCUS

1.Aims

a.Knowledge:

- In order to help ps to revise and improve their knowledge,

+ Future simple tense

+ Modal "will" to make requests, offers and promise
+ In order to, so as to

b.Skill:

- especially the skill of doing exercises after repeating the old main grammar:
 c. attitue

- Help ps to learn better so they love this subject and help them to act quickly when they
meet the same situations in life.

2.preparation: 
a.Tt: Lesson plan, teacher’s book, student's book.

b.Ss: Learning the old lesson, preparing for the new, notebook...
3.procedure:

a.Check old lesson: (5 ) ’
Question:

-Make sentence with ' in order to''
Answer:

</div>
(172)<div class='page_container' data-page=172>

*Introduction :1’

Today we remind all Knowledge have learned
 b.new lesson

* Warm up:5’

-let ps play a game called jumb words.
-tuesqre; ferofs ; mispores domal;
I.Grammar revision :(5’)

-Have ps repeat the usage of future simple
-Have ps make sentence

-Have them give the formation
S +Will/shall +Vm +O/A

-let ps use will to make requests, offers promises
sentence.

-Ask ps to give the meaning of '' inorder to''
and ''so as to '' and the examples.

II Execrise.
1.Execrise 1(6’)

-Ask ps t macth one past of a sentence from the
column A with an other past in column B.then write
sentence by using in order to or so as to .

-Have ps read their answer before the class.
-Have an other ps give remarks .

1.Mary wrote a notice on the board in order to in
from her class mates about the change in sehedule .

2.My elder brother studies hard this year so as to pars
the entrance exam to the university.

3.You should cool the burns immediately so as to
minimire tissue damage.

4.Mr Green got up early this morning in order to get
to the meeting in time.

2.Execrise 2 (6’)

-Have ps read the requrement and give the meaning
of it .

-Have ps work in pairs to complete the dialogue
-Have some pairs practise before the class
1.will 4.will

2.will 5.will
3.won't 6.I'll
3.Execrise 3. (6’)

-Have ps understand the requirement of the execrise
ans use the words under each picture and will

-Have ps work in groups of four.

-Have are presentative from each group give the
answer.

-Correct and ask ps to copy into book
a, Will you give it to me ,please ?

b, Will you answer the tlephone ,please ?
c, Will you turn on the TV, nga ?

d, Will you pour a glass og water for me ?
e, Will you get the cushion , please ?
4.Execrise 4. (6’)

-Have ps work with a partner to make requests , offers
,promises.

-requests ,offers , promises
modal

-Repeat the usage of F.s
-Make sentence s

-thì T L Đơn dùng 1 hành động
diễn ra ở trong tơng lai...
-Make sentence

Eg -Will you open the door ?
-Give the meaning and example
+nhằm để để

-People use the firts aid so as to
ease the victim's pain and anxiety
- Match the two parts into a

meaningful sentence

Read the answer before the class
-Give the remaks

Take notes.

-Read aloud and translate it into
vietnamese

-Work in pairs to complete the
dialogue

Practice before the class

-Complete sentence using the
words under the picture and will
after observing these picture.
-Work ingroups og four.
-Give the answer.

-Correct and copy into notebook.

</div>
(173)<div class='page_container' data-page=173>

-Have them work before the class
-T correct and give the possible answers
a, Will you empty the garbage can ,please ?
b,Will you paint the door ,please ?

c.Will you study harder ?
I promises I'll learn harder .

d, Shall I help you ? Shall I carry the bag for you ?
e, Will you hang the clothes ?

f, Will you cut the vegetable,please ?

-Practice speaking before the class.

c.Consolidation:(3’)

-remind main knowledge today lesson
d.Homework:(2’ )

-Revise all the grammar notes

-Prepare unit 10 ( geting started listen and read ) for the next lesson.

4. NHỮNG KINH NGHIỆM ĐƯỢC RÚT RA SAU KHI GIẢNG :

- Thời gian cho từng phần,tưng hoạt động:

………
……… --
Nội dung kiến thức :

………
……….

- Phương pháp giảng dạy :

………
………

*********************************************************************
Date of preparing: 1/1/2012 Date of teaching: 6/ 1 /2012 class8,D,E
9/ 1/ 2012 class8A

9/ 1/ 2012 class8C

9/ 1/ 2012 class8 B
 Period : 61 Unit 10:

REcycling

getting started + listen and read

1.Aims

By the end of the lesson, Ss will be able to give and respond to instructions.
a.Knowledge:

Vocabulary: Representative, protect
Structure: It is + adj + to infinitive.
b.Skill

-Improve and develop ps' listening and reading skills( their pronunciation and tune)
c.Attitue

- Help ps be aware of / have the sense of responsibility to the natural resources
(environment).

2.preparation:

a.Tt: Lesson plan, teacher’s book, student's book, tape, picture.

b.Ss: Learning the old lesson, preparing for the new, notebook...
3.procedure:

</div>
(174)<div class='page_container' data-page=174>

Question:

?/ Use modal will to make a request sentence
Answer:

Will you+ infinitive....?
* Introduction :(1’)

Today we learn “How to protect the invironment

b.New lesson
* Warm up:5')

-Let's ps play game called hang man to find the word

recyling

-T guides ps to theme of the lesson .

-Have ps work with a partner to discuss about the
ways to reduce the amount of garbage.

Eg: We should use tree leaves to wrap things
p1-we should use cloth bags instead of plastis
bags.

p2-You are right .We should also reuse plastis bags.
p3-We also use garbage to make fertilizer.

-Have ps practice speaking before the class.

-Ask ps to read the first text / paragraph and give the
new words.

-friends of the earth .
-representative.

-Ask ps to read the dialogue to find the new words.
-T explain the words and ask ps to make sentences.
-Let ps listen to the tape (the whole dialogue)
-T explains the words.

2.1 New words
+reuse :tái sử dụng
+reduce: giảm
+recycle :tái chÕ

-Have ps listen to the tape and observe the picture on
page 89

-Have ps give remarks to the sentences and draw a
structure .

Eg :It is difficult to remenber all the new words in a
day .

-Have ps read after the tape

-Have ps work in groups of four to read the dialogue.
-Have ps work before the class

-Ask ps to read the questions on page 90 and read the
dialogue again to find the answer

-Ask ps to work in groups to find the answer (four
groups )

-Have ps give the answer before the class
(representative in each group)

-Have others in other groups give the remarks

-Pay game

1.Getting started:(10')
-Lsten to the teacher.
-Discuss the ways to
reduce the amount of
garbage.

-Pactice before the class
-Read the first paragraph
and give the meaning of
words

2.Listen and read: (19'.)

-Find the new words.
-Take notes and make
sentence.

-Listen to the tape
-Take notes.

-Listen to the tape and
observe the book page 89
-Give remarks

-Give structure

=>S + be + adj + to inf....
-Read after the tape
-Work in groups of of
four to read the dialogue.
-Read aloud before the
class

-Read the question page
90

2.2.Answer the 
questions.

</div>
(175)<div class='page_container' data-page=175>

-T correct.

a, Reduce means not buying products which are over
packaged.

b, We can reuse things like envelops,glass ,plactic
bottles and old plastic bags

c, Recycle means not just throwing things away. Try
and find another use for them

d,We can look for information on recycling things by
having a contact with an organization like friends of
the Earth , going to the local library or asking our
family and friends.

e,We shouldn't use plastic bags because when
we throw them away they could stay very long and
could not be self destroyed /self - demolished).
-Have ps read the dialogue again and explain the
information relating to the questions.

-Work in groups
-Give the answer
-Check and correct

(we put the used things
into special

progress...We may wash
the plastic bags,

bottles...and reuse them)
-Work in groups of four
to read the dialogue

c.Consolidation:(3’)

-remind main knowledge today lesson
+reuse :t¸i sư dơng

+reduce: giảm
+recycle :tái chế

Structure: It is + adj + to infinitive
d.Homework:(2')

-Learning the new structure and words .
-Read the dialogue as many as possible
-Prepare speaking part for the next lesson.

4. NHỮNG KINH NGHIỆM ĐƯỢC RÚT RA SAU KHI GIẢNG :

- Thời gian cho từng phần,tưng hoạt động:

………
……… --
Nội dung kiến thức :

………
……….

- Phương pháp giảng dạy :

………
………

*************************************************************************
*********************************************************************
Date of preparing: 4/2012 Date of teaching: 9/1/2012 class8,D,B,C
101/ 2012 class8A
10/1/2012 class8E

Period : 62 Unit 10:

sPeak

-

listen

1.Aims

By the end of the lesson, Ss will be able to:
a.Knowledge:

</div>
(176)<div class='page_container' data-page=176>

+ shovel; pick ; grain product ; compost heap ; shade ; fabric leather ; keep +ving.
+Grammar:

b.Skill

-improve p's speaking skills. listening
 c. Attitue:

- Help ps to love English and be excited to learn this subjed.

2.preparation:

a.Tt: Lesson plan, teacher’s book, student's book.

b.Ss: Learning the old lesson, notebook, student's book.
3.procedure :

a.Check old lesson:(5')
Question:

?/ Read the dialogue ( on page 89) aloud and give the answer for the question.
+ How can we reduce the garbage ?

Answer:

- Read aloud, fluently, exactly

-> we can reduce the amount of gar bage by not buying things which are overpackaged.
* Introduction :(1')

* Today we continue to learn Unit 10 Speak and listen.
b.New lesson

* Warm up:5’

?/ How can we classify the garbage and what can
we reuse / recycle ?

1.SPEAK (14’)
Pre - speaking:

- Ask ps to look at the book on page 91 and
observe the picture.

- Have them read the words in box and classify
the garbage in 7 groups.

- Paper : evelopes , card board boxes , paper, old /
used newspapers, book.

- glass : bottles, glasses, Jars.

- plastic: plastic bags, plastic bottles , plastic
wares.

- Metal : food cans , drinking cans, tins
- Vege: fruit peels, vegetables.

- Fabric : clothes, piece of materials.
- Leather : shoes , sandals , school bags.
 While - speaking.

- Have ps practice speaking some dialogues like
the ones on page 91.

Eg:

A. Which group do clothes belong to?
B. Put them in " Fabric".

A. What can we do with those clothes ?

B.We can recycle them and make them into paper
or shopping bags.

- Ask ps to practice speaking in pairs.

- Have ps practice speaking before the class.
Eg:

A.Which group do fruit peels belong to?
B. Put them in "vegetable matter"

A. What can we do with them ?

B. We can recycle them and make them into
compost and fertilizer our feilds.

- Answer

- Look at the picture on page 91.
- Read the words and classify the
garbage.

- Practice speaking the same
dialodgues like the ones page 91.

- Practice in pairs

- Practice before the class.

</div>
(177)<div class='page_container' data-page=177>

Post - speaking:

- Have ps speak about the recycled garbages.
-Ask ps to discuss about the question "What could
we do in our school/house to minimize the

garbage we produce ?"

2. LISTEN(15’)

Pre - listening.

- Ask ps to read the requirement of this part and
the four questions on page 91.

- Have ps guess the answer (work in
groups)

While - listening

- Have ps listen to the tape and grasp the main in
formations.

- Have ps listen to the recording and check the
answers.

-Ask ps to work in groups of eight

- Let ps tp give their answer after listening to the
recording for the third time.(representative from

each group gives the answer before the class)
- Ask ps to write the answer on the papers

- Have ps read the answer and T check by asking
other ps to raise hands to suppose.

- T gives the correct answers.
a/ A b/ B c/ B d/ B.

Post - listening

- Let ps listen to the tape for the last time.
- Have ps write the new words in the listening
lesson:

- keep + V-ing:TiÕp tục làm
- add to st:Thêm vào

- shovel:
- pick:nhặt

of reducing , recycling and reusing
garbage and moreover it is

environment problem.

- work in groups to guess.

- listen to the tape and grosp the
main infor mations.

- listen to the tape and check.
- give the answer.

- write on the paper.
- check their answers.

- Listen to the tape.

- Listen to the tape for the last time
-Write the new words in the listening
lesson

c.Consolidation:(3’)

-remind main knowledge today lesson
- keep + V-ing:TiÕp tơc lµm

- add to st:Thêm vào
- shovel:

- pick:nhặt
d.Homework:2'

-Ask ps to write about their ideas about recycling garbage into their notebooks.
-Prepare for the next listening lesson.

4. NHỮNG KINH NGHIỆM ĐƯỢC RÚT RA SAU KHI GIẢNG :

- Thời gian cho từng phần,tưng hoạt động:

</div>
(178)<div class='page_container' data-page=178>

………
……….

- Phương pháp giảng dạy :

………
………

Date of preparing: 7/1/2012 Date of teaching: 10/ 1 /2012 class8c
11/ 1/ 2012 class8b,a
12/ 1/ 2012 class8d.e

Period : 63 Unit 10

: Read

1.Aims

a.Knowledge:

Grammar:use the passive voice..
Vocabulary:

+ pipe ; refill ; melt ; break up ; make into ; dung ; law ; deposit.
+ passive voice : s + be + pII.

b.Skill:

-improve p's reading
 c. Attitue

- Help and educate ps the sense of repsponsibility to the nature..

2.preparation: 
a.Tt: Lesson plan, teacher’s book, student's book, real objects.

b.Ss: Learning the old lesson, notebook, preparing for the new.
3. Procedure

a.Check old lesson:5' 
Question:

?/ do exercise 2 on page 59 in work book
.Answer.

a/ protect
b/ reduce
c/ fertilizer
d/ recycling
e/ empty
* Introduction.

Today we continue to learn Unit 11:Read.
b.New lesson.

* Warm up:5’

- Let ps play agame to find the word : the Green
Gazette.

- Gazette: means: mục trên báo

- Explain the words and introduce ps to the content
of the text.

Pre - reading.8'

- Have ps look at the black bourd and listen to
Teacher's requirement.

</div>
(179)<div class='page_container' data-page=179>

- Have ps listen to T onece.

- T give the real objects such as glass pipe, plastic
pipe ; word pipe .... and ask ps to guess the meaning
pipes.

- Explain the new words by letting them guess the
meanings.

- pipe (n): èng
- melt (v):tan

- break up (v): nghiỊn , lµm vì
- law (n): luËt

- prevent sb from doing st: ngăn cản ai...
While - reading.17'

- Have ps read the questions on page 93 first and
read the text.

- Have ps work in groups of eight.

- Have ps read the text aloud and each group reads
one paragraph.

- Have ps give the answer before the class.

- Have other groups give remarks and their answer
and the informaions in the text.

- T check and give correct answers.

a/ people cleaned and refilled emply milk bottles.
b/ the glass is broken up, melted and made into new
glass wares.

c/ the Oregon government made anew law that 
these must be a ... recycling.

d/ Compost is made from house hold and garden 
waste.

e/ If we have a recyding story to share we can call 
or fax the magazine at 5265456.

- Ask ps to read the whole text again and have ps
work in pairs to comple the sentenees in exercise 2
on page 93.

- Ask ps to write the complete sentences on the B.B.
- Have other ps give remarks and T correct

1 Car tires are recycled and refilled with milk.
 2. Milk bottles are cleaned and refilled with 
milk.

3. Glass is broken up, melted and made into new
glass ware.

4. Drink cans are bronght back forrecy../
 5. House hold and waste is made into compost.

Post - reading.5'
- Ask ps to under lined the parts be + PII.
- Have ps give the remarks.

- T explains the passive voice's usage and formation.
- Ask ps to give the exaruples.

S + Be + PII.

Eg: She is picked up at school.
He is asked to do the exercises.
- Have ps read the text once again.

- Listen to the teacher.

- Observe and guess the meaning.
* New words

- pipe (n): èng
- melt (v):tan

- break up (v): nghiỊn , lµm vì 
- law (n): lt

- prevent sb from doing st: ngăn cản
ai...

While - reading
1.Answer

- Read ques tions first and read the
text.

- Work in groups.
- Read aboud.
- Give the answers.
- Give remarks.

- Correct the answers.

2.work with a partner.complete 
the sentences to make……

- Read the text again and complete
the sentences with informations in

the text.

- Write on the B.B.

- Cheek and correct the answes.
Post - reading

- Under line the parts be + PII
- Give remarks.

- Take notes.

</div>
(180)<div class='page_container' data-page=180>

c.Consolidation:(3)

-remind main knowledge today lesson
pipe (n): èng

- melt (v):tan

- break up (v): nghiỊn , lµm vì
- law (n): lt

- dung (n): Phân xanh,

- prevent sb from doing st: ngăn c¶n ai...
S + Be + PII.

d.Homework2'

- Learn by heart the new words and new grammar.

- Do exercises page 60,61,62,63 in work book.
- Prepare part " write" for the next lesson.

4. NHỮNG KINH NGHIỆM ĐƯỢC RÚT RA SAU KHI GIẢNG :

- Thời gian cho từng phần,tưng hoạt động:

………
……… --
Nội dung kiến thức :

………
……….

- Phương pháp giảng dạy :

………
………

Date of preparing12/1/2012 Date of teaching: 16/ 1 /2012 class8c ,b
17/ 1/ 2012 class8d,d
18/ 1/ 2012 class8e

Period : 63 Unit 10:

write

1.Aims

a.Knowledge:

-vocabulary: first , second , finally...
- Grammar:

b.Skill:

- Help ps to revise the way of writing giving instructions , specially is instruction on how to
recycle somethings like paper, used tea leaves by using some ordinal words:

c. Attitue

- Help ps raise their conciousness to protect the environment and save natural resources.
2.preparation:

a.Tt: Lesson plan, teacher’s book, student's book, real objects.
b.Ss: Learning the old lesson, notebook, preparing for the new.
3. Procedure

a. check old lesson :5
Question:

?/ what happens to the glass when it is sent to the factory ?
.Answer.

The glass is broken up, melted and made into new glass ware.
* Introduction:

</div>
(181)<div class='page_container' data-page=181>

b. New lesson:
* warm up.5

- Give ps the cans, (drink cans plastic cans, Jars,
sandals, shoes , papers ) and ask ps to sort out
these things in to groups to recycle.

- Let ps play in groups to find the group finishing
the game first.

Pre - writing.8’

* There are many things that can be recycled.
However, not many of us know how these
materials are recycled. In this lesson, we will
know how to recycle tea leaves and papers into
new items.

- Ask ps to work in pairs to read the para- graph
about the paper recycling on pape 93.

- Ask ps to guess the meaning of the new words.
- Have some pairs read their answers.

- T gives the correct answers.
0: soak 4. press

1. use 5. wrap
2. mix 6. wait
3. place 7. dry.

- Have ps take notes the new words :

- soak : làm thấm / ớt / ngâm.

- dry (v) : phơi khô
- press (v) : ấn đèn
- Bucket (n) thùng, xơ
- Overnight: qua đêm

- wooden spoon (n) : th×a gỗ
- mash (v) bóp, nghiền nát
- firmly (adj) mạnh, chặt
- wire mesh (n) Líi s¾t

- In some areas people burn dry tea leaves to keep
mosquitoes away. Make the directions on how to
prepare the tea leaves by using the pictures and
given words in the box.

while - writing.12’

- Ask ps to work individually by using the words
given in the book.

- explain the new words:
+ scatter (v) Rải,rắc
+ tray (n) khay, mâm

- Hav ps give their answers on the B.
- Ask three 3 ps to work on the B.
- T check and correct the answers.

a/ first , take the used tea leaves from the teapot.
b/ Next, scatter the tealeaves on a tray

c/ then, dry the leaves in the sun.

d/ finally, put the dry leaves in a pot for future use.
post - writing:10’

- Ask ps to copy the exrcise 1on page 93 into
notebook.

- Have one pupil read the exercise aloud before

- play game "sorting out".
+ paper : papers.

+ metal : drink cans.
+ plastic : plastic cans.
+ glass : Jars

+ leather : shoes, sandals.
Pre - writing.

1.Complete the recycling 
instruction..

- listen to teacher.

- work in pairs to read complete the
para- graph.

- guess the meaning of new words.
- read their ansuers.

- correct the answers.

- take notes.

- listen to the teacher
 while - writing

2.Insome areas people burn dry tea
leaves…

- work in dividually.
- take notes.

- write the answers on the B.B
- check and correct.

</div>
(182)<div class='page_container' data-page=182>

the class. - coppy the exercise 1.
- read aloud.

c.Consolidation:(3)

-remind main knowledge today lesson
+ scatter (v) Rải,rắc

+ tray (n) khay,
dry (v) : phi khụ

- press (v) : ấn đèn
- Bucket (n) thùng, xô
- Overnight: qua ờm

- wooden spoon (n) : thìa gỗ
- mash (v) bóp, nghiền nát
- firmly (adj) mạnh, chặt
- wire mesh (n) Líi s¾t
d.homework:2

-Llearn the new words by heart.
- Do exercises 6,7,8 on page 64.

- Prepare the "language fous" for the next.

4. NHỮNG KINH NGHIỆM ĐƯỢC RÚT RA SAU KHI GIẢNG :

- Thời gian cho từng phần,tưng hoạt động:

………
……… --
Nội dung kiến thức :

………
……….

- Phương pháp giảng dạy :

………
………

Date of preparing: 12/1/2012 Date of teaching: 18/ 1 /2012 class8a,b
17/ 1/ 2012 class8c
19/ 1/ 2012 class8d,e

Period : 64 Unit 10:

language focus

1.Aims

a.Knowledge:
+vocabulary:
+grammar:
+ s + be + PII

+ S + Vaux + Vm + be + PII.
+ S + be + adj + to ing

+ S + be + adj + (that) + clause
b.Skill:

- Improve ps doing exercise skill and help them understand thoroug ly about the new
grammar structunes changing adive form in to passive one.

c. Attitue

</div>
(183)<div class='page_container' data-page=183>

2.preparation: 
a.Tt: Lesson plan, teacher’s book, student's book.

b.Ss: Learning the old lesson, notebook, preparing at home,...
3. Procedure

a. check old lesson :(5)
*. questions:

?/ How to make used tea leaves into useful thing to keep the mosquitoes away?
*. answer

a/ First, take the used tea leaves from the pot.
b/ Next, seatter the tea leaves on atray.

c/ them, dry the leaves in the sun.

d/ finally, put the dry leaves in a pot for future use.
*Introduction

Today we continue to learn Unit 11
b. New leson:

*warm up (7)
1. Passive voice:

- Give an example and ask ps to give the structure
of P.V.

: English is spoken all over the wold.

- Ask ps to put the verb "be" in present, past, and
future tense.

- Have ps make sentences.

- give ps the way of changing from active in to
passive form.

- Ask ps to change these sentences.

a/ My parents take me to the 200 once a month.
b/ They will change the date of the meeting again.
c/ I saw the man in the garden last night.

d/ Nobody takes care of her.

- Ask ps to do exercise 1 page 95. (7)

- Have 2 ps write the sentences ab, cd on the B.B.
- give the correct sentences.

a/ the glass is broken in to small pieces.

b/ then the glass is washed with a detergent liquid.
c/ the glass pieces are dried completely.

d/ The mixture is melted until it becomes a liquid.
f/ A long pipe is used. It is dipped in to a liquid.
Then the liquid is blown into intended shapes.
- In order to further understand the grammar you
Now do the exercise 2 page 96 to complete the
dialogue between Mr Kim, afamous... they are
talking about the coming invention of a time
machine. (7)

Ask ps to work in pairs.

- Have some pairs to read aloud their answer.
1. will be shown.

2. will it be built.
3. will be finished.
4. will it be made.

2. Adjective + to -infinitive 
- Introduce ps the structuse:

- observe and draw out the form
=> S + be + PII + A.

- put the verb "be" in present, past
and future tense.

- make sentences.
- take notes

- do the exercisen.
a/ I am taken to ...

b/ The date will be changed agan.
c/ The man was seen

d/She is not taken care of ...
1.Work with a partner

-Work individually
-Write on the B.B

-Lopy the right sentence
-Listen to T

- complete the dialogue by using the
correct from of the verbs

2.Afamous inventor,Dr Kim,is…..
-Work in pairs

-read aloud the answer

-take notes

</div>
(184)<div class='page_container' data-page=184>

It's + adj (for sb) + to infi
- Have ps make sentences ?

-Now do exercise 3 page 96 to use the adjs and
verbs in the box ? (7)

- Ask ps to work in pairs.
- Have some pairs read aloud.
a/ It's easy to understand
b/ It's hard to believe.
c/ It's dangerous to go.
d/ It's im por tant to wait...

- give the structure when adjectives can be followed

by a clause.

Ask ps to give examples and do exercise 4 on page
97.(7)

- Have ps do in groups of eight.

- Ask a representative of each group to read their
answers.

- Have other groups give remarks.
1. was happy. 4. are ... sure
2. am relieved 5. am certain
3. is afraid 6.

3.Complete the dialogues…
-complete sentence with adjectives
and verbs

-Work in pairs
-read aloud in pairs

-listen to T and write down.
4. Complete the letter…

-Give examples and do exerci se4
-work in groups

-give the answer
-give remarks.

c.Consolidation:(3)

-remind main knowledge today lesson
Active: S + will + V + O + .

Passive: S(o) + will + be + PP + .
Would/ Do you mind....?

d.Homework:(2)

- Rewrite the exercises in notebook.

- Prepare unit 11 lesson 1 for the next lesson.
- Do exercises: 8,9 in work book on page 64

4. NHỮNG KINH NGHIỆM ĐƯỢC RÚT RA SAU KHI GIẢNG :

- Thời gian cho từng phần,tưng hoạt động:

………
……… --
Nội dung kiến thức :

………
……….

- Phương pháp giảng dạy :

………

Date of preparing:12/1/2012 Date of teaching: 19/ 1 /2012 class8b,c
20/ 1/ 2012 class8e

20/ 1/ 2012 class8a,d
TiÕt 65. Unit 11.TRAVELING AROUND VIETNAM

Lesson 1:

GETTING STARTED+LISTEN AND READ
1.Aims

a.Knowledge:

</div>
(185)<div class='page_container' data-page=185>

-Harbor ; a 40 minute drive ; sugar cane
+Structures :

-Would you mind + V-ing ...?
-Would you mind if + clause ?
 -See sb doing st.

b.Skill:

-Help ps to practise their skills on recognizing and describing the pictures and to develope
their making dialogues skills

c. Attitue

-Help ps to consolidate their love for our country and they feel proud of our country.
2.preparation:

a.Tt: Lesson plan, Student's book ,teacher's book ,tape ,cassette.
b.Ss: notebook, learning the old lesson ,preparing for the new one.
3. Procedure

a. check old lesson :5'
Question:

?/ change the following sentence into passive
voice.

a,We will take the exam in 2 days
b,Mr Bell invented the phone
.Answer.

a/the exam will be take in 2 day
b/the phone was invented by Mr Bell.
*Introduction:

Today we continue to learn lesson 11
b.New lesson:'

*warm up 7

-Have ps observe the pictures like the ones in book
on page 98 and recognize these places of interest.
-Ask ps to work in pairs to match the names with
these pictures.

-Have some ps talk about these pictures
-T gives the correct answers:

a. Ngo Mon gate.
b. Nha Rong Harbor.

c. The temple of Literature.
d. Ha Long Bay.

-Have other ps talk about the other places in Ha Noi,
HCM city, Hue...

1. New words:5'

-Play the tape for the 1st time and ask ps to answer
the questions after listening to the tape.

Who are talking in the conversation ?
Where are they now ?

+ corn: ngô

+sugar cane: Cây mía

+a 40minute drive : chuyÕn ®i 40'
+see sb do st/ doing st.

+ Would you mind + V-ing ...?

I.Getting started 7

- Observe the pictures like the ones
in book on page 98 and recognize
these places of interest.

- Work in pairs to match the names 
with these pictures.

- Talk about these pictures before 
the class

II.Listen and read

- Talk about the other places in Ha
Noi, HCM city, Hue...

for example :

Ha Noi (Hoan kiem lake, West
lake, Dong Xuan market...)

HCM city (Ben thanh market, Dam
sen Park, Cu chi tunnel)

1. New words

</div>
(186)<div class='page_container' data-page=186>

-Diễn tả lời y/c 1 cách lịch sự.
+ Would you mind if I + V / V-ed ?
-Diễn tả y/c đợc làm gì

2. Practice:20'

-Ask ps to give the examples using the structures
-Have ps listen to the tape and read after the tape
-Have ps practise reading the dialogue in groups of
five

-Have 2 groups read aloud before the class.
-Ask ps to answer some questions

?/ Where does Hoa meet Tim ?
?/Who does Tim come to VN with ?

?/ How long does it take them to get to HN ?
?/ What does Tim like to do on the way to HN ?
-Now read the conversation again and decide

whether the statements are true or false .Correct the
false ones.

-Ask ps to read their answers.
a. T

b. T

c.F (in a taxi)

d. T

e. T

f.F(not only rice and corn but also sugar canes are
grown around HN

-Have 5 ps read the conversation again)

. Practice:20'
1. practice…

- Give the examples using the
structures

- Listen to the tape and read after
the tape

- Practise reading the dialogue in
groups of five

- group wok reading aloud before
the class.

- Answer some questions
2.True or false?Check(v)..

- Read the conversation again and
decide whether the statements are
true or false

-Repeat the places of interest in this
lesson and the structures

c.Consolidation:5'

-Have ps repeat the places of interest in this lesson and the structures
+ Ha Noi, HCM city...

+ Would you mind + V-ing...?
d.Homework:3'

-Learn by heart the new words

-Do exercises 1 and 2 on page 65 in work book.
-Prepare part "speak" for the next lesson.

4. NHỮNG KINH NGHIỆM ĐƯỢC RÚT RA SAU KHI GIẢNG :

- Thời gian cho từng phần,tưng hoạt động:

………
……… --
Nội dung kiến thức :

………
……….

- Phương pháp giảng dạy :

………
………

</div>
(187)<div class='page_container' data-page=187>

TiÕt 66. Unit 11.

speak-listen

1.Aims

a.Knowledge:
+vocabulary:

-museum , officer
+Structures :

-Would /Do you mind + V-ing ...?
-Would prefer sb did (not) +V st/ V-ed st.
-Would rather sb V-ed st

-See sb doing st.
 b.Skill

-Help ps to improve their speaking skill, playing role as tourist or tourist information
officer

c. Attitue
-Help ps to

-Educate ps to be helpful and willing to help other people
2.preparation:

a.Tt: Lesson plan, Student's book ,teacher's book ,tape ,cassette.

b.Ss: notebook, learning the old lesson ,preparing for the new one.
3. Procedure

a. check old lesson :5'
Question:

?/ put the verb in correct form

a. Would you mind if I (close)the door.
b. I can see the people (work) in the field.
c.Would you mind (open )the door ?
Answer:

a.close

b.work /working
c.opening

*Introduction:

Today we continue to learn Unit 11:Speak and listen.
b..New lesson:

*warm up (5)

-Have ps give remarks about the usage of the structures
in the checking the old lesson part .

1.Speak(15)

1.pre-speaking

-Repeat the structure of requirement with "mind"

Request reply

-Do you mind
closing the door ?
-Would you mind
opening the

window?

-Do you mind if I
take a photo ?
-Wuold you mind
if I took a photo ?

No, I don't
mind.
No, of
course not.
Not at all
please do.
-Please go
ahead

*I'm

sorry. I
can't.
*I'm
sorry that
is not
possible.
*I'd
prefer
you didn't
-Ask ps to copy into notebook and notice the use of
verbs after mind

1.Speak(15)

1.pre-speaking
-Give remarks

</div>
(188)<div class='page_container' data-page=188>

2 While - speaking

-Ask ps to practise in pairs

*Now you work in pairs . One of you is student A and
the other is student B. Look at the information about
your role and use it to make requests and suggestions.
- Ask st A to be a tourist on vacation to HCM city. You
want to visit these places : a market, the zoo, a museum
and a restaurant for lunch. Ask the tourist I. O to suggest
where you could go.

Student B : You are a tourist information officer at Sai

Gon tourist . A tourist is going to ask you for help. You
should make suggestions about which places to visit.
-Ask ps to practise talking to a friend and change the
role.

-Have some pairs speak aloud before the class .
- T explains the situation and give the model
conversation.

A:Excuse me. Can you help me ?
B: Yes sir. What can I do for you ?

A:Yes. Could you please give me some information ?
B: Yes, of course. What In. do you want ?

A:I want to visit a museum. Would you mind suggesting
one ?

B: I suggest you go to the history museum

A:That sounds interesting. Do you mind telling me what
time it opens ?

B:It opens from 8 a.m to 4 p.m every day except
Monday

A:Thank you very much

B:You are welcome . Have a nice day
-Ask ps to make the same dialogues.

3. Post - speaking

- Give the situation (suppose that you meet a tourist who
visit your town for the first time. The T wants to know
some places in your town. Now work in pairs. One of
you is a T and the other is the student of the town.)
-Ask ps to make up the similar dialogues using the
places of interest in the town.

-Have ps practisespeaking aloud their dialogue
-T give some model conversations.

In Viet Tri city.

Y:What can I do for you, sir?

T:I'm staying in VT for 2 days . Would you mind
suggesting me a place to see ?

Y:I suggest you go to Hung King temple - a famous
place of interest in PT province

T:That sounds good. How far is it from VT city to Hung
King temple ?

Y:It's about 20 km . You can go there by car
T:Thank you very much

Y:You are welome

2.listen(15)

2 While - speaking

-Practise in pairs

-Play role

- Practise talking to a friend and
change the role.

-Listen to T

3. Post - speaking

- Make the same dialogues
- Listen to the guide

- Make up the similar dialogues
using the places of interest in the
town.

- Practisespeaking aloud their
dialogue

- Listen to T' eg
2.listen(15)

Pre - listening

1. new words

</div>
(189)<div class='page_container' data-page=189>

Pre - listening

1. new words

-?/ What do you see in the map ?

?/ How many roads/ streets /offices are there ?
-Give ps some new words

+ high way:§êng cao tèc

+ Tourist information center :TT thông tin du lịch
You are going to listen to the tape about the position of
the places mentioned above on the map. You study the
map and listen to the tape to match the places to their
correct positions which are marked on the map.

-Ask ps to observe the map again

While - listening

-Play the tape 3 times

-Ask ps to work in pairs to compare the answer after
listening the tape once again

-Check the ps' understanding about the text.
- Have ps give the correct answer

- Check and correct
2. Answer

a. restaurant
b. hotel
c.busstation
d.pagoda
e.temple

*/ Conversation

Tim: I'm tired

Mrs.Jones: All right. You go back to the hotel and we'll 
go and look at the pagoda.

Tim: OK. But how do I get to the hotel ?

Mrs. Jones:Let me check up the map . Oh, yes. It's
Phong Lan road, just off the highway

...

Shannon: I'm hungry, Mom.

Mrs.Jones: Can you wait until after we 've seen the 
pogoda, S?. The restaurant's in HT road. It's opposite 
the direction from the pogoda.

S: Please, Mom. I'm starving !

Mr.Jones : I'll take you to the R and get st to eat, S, 
We'll let your mother go to the pogoda.

S: Thanks dad. Perhaps we can get some foos at the R 
and eat it beside the river.

Mrs.Jones : As you are going in the direction of the bus 
station, can you book seats on tomorrow's bus to HCM 
city ? The bus station is just opposite the tourist

information center.
...

Shannon : How are you going to get to the pogoda, 
Mom ?

Mrs.JOnes : I'm going to walk over the bridge and take 
the 1st road on the left. If I have time ,I'll also visit an 
old temple, which is just past the pogoda on the same 
road.

...

-Take notes

-Listen to the guide
- Observe the map again

While - listening

- Listen to the tape carefully
- Work in pairs to compare the
answer after listening the tape
once again

2. Answer
a. restaurant
b. hotel
c.busstation
d.pagoda
e.temple

- Listen to the tape for the last
time to confirm the answers

post -listening.

</div>
(190)<div class='page_container' data-page=190>

-Lets ps listen to the tape for the last time to confirm the
answers.

post -listening.

-Have ps practice in pairs to ask about the preposition of
places in Moc Chau.

c.Consolidation:(2’)

-Have ps repeat the use of verb "mind"

d.Homework:3'

-Learn the structures by heart
-Do exe.in workbook (1,2)

- Prepare the part "listen" for the next lesson

4. NHỮNG KINH NGHIỆM ĐƯỢC RÚT RA SAU KHI GIẢNG :

- Thời gian cho từng phần,tưng hoạt động:

………
……… --
Nội dung kiến thức :

………
……….

- Phương pháp giảng dạy :

………
………

Date of preparing: 27/1/2012 Date of teaching: 31/ 1 /2012 class8c
1/ 2/ 2012 class8b,a
2/ 2/ 2012 class8d.e

TiÕt 67. Unit 11.

read

1.Aims

a.Knowledge:

- vocabularies :off shore island, flights, waterfall, tribal village, world heritage.
-structures:

b.Skill:

- Improve and help them to get acquainted with the reading comprehension in reading
information of tourist advertisement programme..

c. Attitue

At the same time help ps improve their doing reading task.
Help them understan and love our country more.

2.preparation:

a. T:lesson plan, teacher'sbook, student'sbook .

b.Ss:learning the old lesson, preparing this lesson carefully, notebook....
3. Procedure

a. check old lesson :4'
Question:

? put these verbs in correct tense /form.
a. I suggest [go] to the zoo.

b. could you [give] me some infomeation please?
c.Do you misd [suggest] one?

</div>
(191)<div class='page_container' data-page=191>

c,suggesting
*Introduction

Today we continue to learn Unit 11:Read
b.new lesson:

*warm up 4'

-Let ps play guessing game about the places
in Viet Nam

-Ask ps to answer 3 questions.
+Question 1:30 mark

+ Question 2: 20 mark
+ Question 3 :10 mark
Eg : It has alot of caves
It consists of many islands
It is in QN province.

Pre - reading 7'

We have played the game of places of
interest in VN . In the reading today, we'll
know more about 4 places :Nha Trang ,Da
Lat,Sa Pa and Ha Long Bay.

- Provide ps with some phrases in the reading
+Seaside resort [n]khu nghi mat

+Oceanic Institude {n}Vien HD hoc
+Giant Bullddha {n}tuong phat khong lo
+Offshore island {n}Dao xa bo

+Eternal spring {n}MX vinh cuu
+Mountain report {n}

UNESCO : United Nation Educational,
Scientific and Cultural Organization {T/c
GD,KH va van hoa cua lien hop quoc }
+Heritage {n}Di San , {ke thua}

Magnificient {adj}long lay
+Limstone island {n}Dao da voi

-Ask ps to read aloud these new words after
T

while -reading 20'

-Ask ps to read /skim to get the main ideas of
advertisement

(You read the advertisements again and
check the topics mentioned in the brochures
about resorts) .

- Ask ps to work individually and compare
with a partner

-Ask ps to give the answer before class
-Check and corect the answer .

Nha

T Da Lat Sapa Ha Long
Caves

flight to HN
Hotels
Local
transport
Mini-hotel
Mountain
slopes

v
v vv

v
v

v
v
v
v

-Play game

-Listen to T
Pre - reading 7'
-Write down

- read aloud these new words after T
while -reading 20'
1.Check(v)the topicsmentioned…
- skim to get the main ideas of
advertisement

- work individually and compare with a
partner

- give the answer before class

</div>
(192)<div class='page_container' data-page=192>

Railway
Restaurants
Sand beaches
Tourist
attraction
type of food
Tribedvillage
water falls

would
heritage

v v

v
v
v

v
v

(Now you work in groups of four and do
exercise 2. There are 5 people who want to
go to VN on their holidays. Each person has
a different hobby. You help them to find a
suitable place)

-Have a prepresentative of each group gives
the idea.

-Give the correct answers and ask ps to draw
a table

NT §L SP HL NR

Andrew *

Mary * * * * *

John *

Joanne *

Donna *

-Have ps read the reading aloud

-T explains the new words and phrases
-Ask ps to write the sentences using
"because"

Eg: Because Donna is a florist, she should go
to DL

Post - reading 5'

-Have 4 ps read the advertisements on page
103 aloud

-Have ps read the reading on page 105 aloud

2.Answer
-Listen to T

- read the reading aloud

- write the sentences using "because"

Post - reading 5'

-4 ps read the advertisements on page 103
aloud

- read the reading on page 105 aloud

c.consolidation:(2’)

-Have ps repeat the use of verb "mind"
+Seaside resort [n]khu nghi mat

+Oceanic Institude {n}Vien HD hoc
+Giant Bullddha {n}tuong phat khong lo
+Offshore island {n}Dao xa bo

+Eternal spring {n}MX vinh cuu
+Mountain report {n}

UNESCO

d.homework:3'

-Learn new words by heart
-Do exercises 7,8 on page

-Prepare the writing part for the next lesson

</div>
(193)<div class='page_container' data-page=193>

- Thời gian cho từng phần,tưng hoạt động:

………
……… --
Nội dung kiến thức :

………
……….

- Phương pháp giảng dạy :

………
………

Date of preparing: 27/1/2012 Date of teaching: 2/ 2 /2012 class8c ,b
3/ 2/ 2012 class8d,e
3/ 2/ 2012 class8a

TiÕt 68. Unit 11. Write

1. Aim:

a.Knowledge:

+ Vocabulary: stumble, go off,rescue
+Structures:

b.Skill:

-Help ps to get aquainted with the narrative writing.After finishing this lesson ps can put
the sentences in the correct order and complete a story

c. Attitue

-Help the ps love learning English
2.preparation:

a. T:lesson plan, teacher'sbook, student'sbook .

b. Ss:learning the old lesson, preparing this lesson carefully, notebook....
3. Procedure

a. check old lesson :5'
Question:

?use" mind" to rewrite the sentences

a.Can you solve this math problem for me ?
b. can I use your computer ?

Answer

a.Do you mind solving ....

b. Would you mind If I used...
*Introduction

* Today we continue to learn Unit 11 write
b.New lesson:

*warm up 4'

Narration is a kind of writing in which you report
events (you tell s.o about st that happened)

Narration is used in many different situations.
Anarrative paragraph is usually organized in
chnological order. That means the exact name and
place are introduced right in the topic sentence and
the details are written in the same order that really
happen

</div>
(194)<div class='page_container' data-page=194>

Pre – writing 7’

-Ask ps to read the story and answer some
questions

Where did the browns go last week ?
What was the weather like ?

The paragraph bases on chonological order . How
do you know ?

1. New words

-Explain some words

+ adventure : phiêu lu, mạo hiểm
+ paddle (n)/(v) mái chèo/ Đạp nớc

wilth writing 14

2. Practice

- Now you read the next part of the story and
complete the story by rewriting the sentences in the
correct chnological order

-Ask ps to read the sentences aloud
-Have ps work in pairs

-Have some ps give their answers then T correct
c-a-g-d-f-b-e.

-Look at the pictures in your books. these ps are
about Uyen's memorable day. You put the eventsin
the correct chronological

order and complete the story by using the pictures
and words as prompts

-Have ps work in groups

-Have the representative give the answer
-T corrects

d-b-e-h-a-f-c-g

-Ask ps to write the sentences in groups

-Have 4 groups write the 8 sentences

-Have their answers then check and correct before
the class

d. She had a math exam on Friday and she got up 
late

b. She realized her alarm clock did not go off.
e. As she was leaving home it started to rain 
heavily

h, Uyen tried to run as fast as she could

a. Suddenly she tumbled against a roct and she fell 
onto the road

f. Her school bag went into o pool and everything 
got wet

c. Strangely , the rain stopped as she got to her 
classroom

g. Luckily, Uyen had enough time to finish her
exam

Post – writing 10’

-Have ps with the main events of the paragraph and
ask ps to write in the narration.

Eg: Last week, we.... HaLong. We visited a lot of
caves...took many photographs ....fetl very

Pre – writing

- Read the story and answer some
questions

- Copy the words

wilth – writing 14’

1.Now,put the sentenves below in 
the correct..

- Listen to T

- Read the sentences aloud
-Work in pairs

2. put the events below in the 
correct …

- Listen to T

-Work in groups

- The representative give the answer
- Write the sentences in groups

-Copy into notebooks

Post – writing 10’

</div>
(195)<div class='page_container' data-page=195>

happy... wonderful trip...

-Have representative give the ideas

-Check and correct their mistake if necessary -Representative give the ideas

c.Consolidation:(2’)

-Have ps repeat the use of verb "mind"
+ adventure : phiêu lu, mạo hiểm
+ paddle (n)/(v) mái chèo/ Đạp nớc
d.Homework:3'

-Learn the new wors by heart.

-Do the exer. on page 67,68 in work book
-Prepare language focus for the next lesson

4. NHỮNG KINH NGHIỆM ĐƯỢC RÚT RA SAU KHI GIẢNG :

- Thời gian cho từng phần,tưng hoạt động:

………
……… --
Nội dung kiến thức :

………
……….

- Phương pháp giảng dạy :

………
………

Date of preparing: 4/2/2012 Date of teaching: 6/ 2 /2012 class8c.b
7/ 2/ 2012 class8d.a
8/ 2/ 2012 class8a

TiÕt 69. Unit 11.

language focus

1. Aim:

a.Knowledge:

Grammar: use "ed" and "ing" participles and revise suggestion sentences with "mind"
 b.Skill:

-Help ps to improve and practise the describing picture skill and complete the dialogue
basing on the pictures

c. Attitue

-Help the ps love learning English and be polite in communicating
2.preparation:

a. T:lesson plan, teacher'sbook, student'sbook .

b. Ss:learning the old lesson, preparing this lesson carefully, notebook....
3. Procedure

a. check old lesson :5'
Question:

?complite the sentence .

a/ My mon /go /HCM city / last year.
b/English /speak /all /would .

Answer.

</div>
(196)<div class='page_container' data-page=196>

Today we continue to learn Unit 11 language focus
b.new lesson:

*warm up 4

- Have ps play game :matching the work .
. made watching

playing make
watch play
stand talking
talk standing

1.Grammar :9'
-Have ps look at the example.

The boy reading a book is be.
.The doll made in china is l 10
-Have ps give the remaks
* notice.

-Ing participles :Phân từ hiện tại- Phân từ tác động
(active participle)

-Ed participle(phân từ qk)phân từ bị động

-Một trong nhiều cách dùng của chúng là dùng để rút
gọn mệnh đề tính ngữ

Eg: The boy is my brother.He is sitting in the room
= The boy sitting in the room is my brother.

The bikes are very good. They are made in Japan
2. Exercises

2.1 E.1 - 8'

-Ask ps to look at the pictures in their books and say
who each person is following the example.

-Have ps write the sentences
-Ask ps to give their answers

The man walking up the stairs is Mr.Quang
The girl standing by the table is Lan

-Ask ps to do exer.2 on page 109 . Use the past participle
of verbs in the box to describe the goods for sale in the
picture.

-Have ps work individually

-Have them compare with their friends' answers
-T checks and corrects

The old lamp made in china is 5 dollars
The doll dressed in red is 2 dollars

The toy animals kept in a card board are 10 dollars
The struck made from recycled aluminum can is 2
dollars

2.2 Would/ Do you mind....? 7'

-Have ps work with a partner, use the words to make and
respond to requests, a "cross" means do no agree and a
"check" means agree to the requests.

-Have ps give the structure

-Ask ps to practise speaking before the class

-Play game
made - made
watch - watching

play - playing
talk - talking
...

1.Grammar :

- Look at the example

-Take notes

2. Exercises

1. Look at the people in the 
schoolyard…

-Do individually

- Look at the pictures in their
books and say who each person
is

2. Look at this stall,….
- write the sentences

-Correct into notebooks
- Use the past participle of
verbs in the box to describe the
goods for sale in the picture.
- work individually

- compare with their friends'
answers

</div>
(197)<div class='page_container' data-page=197>

2.3 Would / Do you mind if...?7'

-Have ps work in pairs then practise before the class
-T checks and corrects

+Would you mind if I sat down?
Please do

+ Would you mind if I smoked?
I'd rather you didn't

+Do you mind if I watch TV while eating lunch ?
No, of course not

4. Work with a partner.
- Work with a partner, use the
words to make and respond to
requests

- give the structure

- practise speaking before the
class

- Work in pairs then practise
before the class

-checks and copy
c.consolidation:(2’)

-Have ps repeat the use of verb "mind"
d.homework:3'

-Revise all the old lesson carefully for the next written test

4. NHỮNG KINH NGHIỆM ĐƯỢC RÚT RA SAU KHI GIẢNG :

- Thời gian cho từng phần,tưng hoạt động:

………
……… --
Nội dung kiến thức :

………
……….

- Phương pháp giảng dạy :

………
………

Date of preparing: 4/2/2012 Date of teaching: 7/ 2 /2012 class8c
8/ 2/ 2012 class8b,a
9/2/ 2012 class8e.d
Period :70 REVISION

1. Aims

a. Knowledge :

- Content: Passive forms, _ing and _ed participles, Adjectives, Noun clauses, in order to V
(purpose), requests, offers, promises, …

b. Skills

-By the end of the lesson, Ss will be able to revise vocab and structures learnt in the last three
units. They’ll complete the exercises given.

c. Attitue:

-Help the ps love learning English and be polite in communicating

2.preparation. 
a. T :lesson plan, teacher'sbook, student'sbook .

b. Ss:learning the old lesson, preparing this lesson carefully, notebook....
3. Procedure

a. Checking the previous lesson ( omit )
*Introduction

</div>
(198)<div class='page_container' data-page=198>

1. Vocabulary(10')

Ask ss to revise the vocabulary learnt in the
last three units as much as possible

Ss work individually, pair and compare
Ask ss to do the exercise on the OHP

2. Grammar and structures

2.1 Passive form (10')
- Present simple tense

S + am / is/ are + past participle ( + by Obj)
Use: Receiver is important and need to be
emphasized. The agent (the doer is

unknown, unimportant or understood)
- Future simple/ Modals

S + will / can + be + past participle (by Obj)

2.2 _ing and _ed participles(10')

1. The man...(walks/ to walk/ walked/
walking) over there is Mr Ha.

2. The old lamp …… in China is five

1. Vocab

1. They tried to talk to the victim to
keep her...(alive/ awake/ asleep)
2. You can...(turn on/ turn up/

turn off) the T.V now. I'm not
watching it.

3. ...(To reuse/ To recycle/ To
reduce) means to make something
less or smaller in size, quantity and
price.

4. John wants to …… (visit/ meet/
stay/ live) the place where he once
lived in VN

5. The little girl …… (dressed/ wear/
put on) in blue is one of my nieces.
2. Grammar and structures
2.1 Passive form

1. People grow rice in tropical
countries

Rice is …

2. They make compost from
household and garden waste



Compost is …

3. They break the glass into small

pieces



The glass is

4. People throw millions of cans all
over the world every year



Millions of cans are ….

5. They break up the glass, melt it and
make it into new glasssware



The glass is …

6. They make household and garden
waste into compost



Household and garden waste is …
7. They recycle used plastic things to
save natural resourses



Used plastic things are …

8. People can recycle car tires to make
pipes and floor-covering



Car tires can be …

9. When will you start the new
project?



When will the new project …?

10. Will you make the time machine?



</div>
(199)<div class='page_container' data-page=199>

dollars. (to make/ making/ made)

3. The man talking/ talked to the policeman
is my uncle.

4 Most of people inviting/ invited to dinner
were old friends.

5. The man injuring/ injured in the accident

was taken to the hospital.

6. A man calling/ called Jack phoned while
you were out this morning.

7. Most of the goods making/ made in this
factory are exported.

8. The window breaking/ broken in last
night’s storm has now been repaired.

9. That was a play writing/ written by Luu
Quang Vu.

10. The girl drinking/ drunk coffee is Mary
Allen.

2.3 Requests, offers, promises(10')
Matching

A B

1. I want to visit a
museum. Could you
suggest one?

2. Shall I carry the
bag for you ?

3. Do you mind if I

use your phone?
4. I'll give it back to
you on Sunday. I
promise

5. Could you give
me a bandage,
please?

6. Would you mind
if I smoked here?

a. Please, go ahead
b. Yes, That's very
kind of you

c. I hope so

d. I'd rather you
didn't

e. I suggest going

to History

museum

f. Sure. Here you
are.

3. Writing
4. Reading
5. Listening

3. _ing and _ed participles

4. Requests, offers,, promises

5. Adjectives, Nouns clauses, in 
order to

1. I / happy / you / pass / all the exams
2. It / interesting / learn English..
3. People / use / first-aid / in order /
ease / victim’s pain / anxiety.

1. Thank you/ the book/ sent me/ my
birthday.

2. It/ be/ interesting.

3. I/ feel/ happy/ when I / receive/ the
book.

4. I/ read/ book/ two day.
5. Now/ I/ feel/ sad.

</div>
(200)<div class='page_container' data-page=200>

Con Son.

7. Will/ you/ go/ us?

8. I/ phone /you/ Friday evening.
c. Consolidation (3')

- Present simple tense

S + am / is/ are + past participle ( + by Obj
- ing and _ed participles

d. Homework (2')

4. NHỮNG KINH NGHIỆM ĐƯỢC RÚT RA SAU KHI GIẢNG :

- Thời gian cho từng phần,tưng hoạt động:

………
……… --
Nội dung kiến thức :

………
……….

- Phương pháp giảng dạy :

………
………

Date of preparing: 6/2/2012 Date of teaching: 9/ 2 /2012 class8c .b
10/ 2/ 2012 class8d,e.a

TiÕt 71. KiÓm tra 1 tiÕt
 1. Aims

a. Knowledge :

-Help ps to check their knowledge and have right attitude to the subject, especially about 3
skills such as speaking, reading and writing
2.matrix

3.The content of exam
Chủ đề

Nhận biÕt Thông hiểu

Vận

dung Cộng

Thấp C

a
o

TNKQ TL TNKQ TL TNKQ TL TNKQ TL

LISTENING

Listen to a dialogue
then choose the most

suitable word or phrase
to answer the question.

Số câu hỏi 4 4

Số điểm 2 2(20%)

VOCABULARY +

</div>

giao an anh8 theo cv961 tinh

<b>Unit 1: my friends</b>

<b>c.Post</b>

:

<b>Unit 3: At home</b>

<b>c.Post</b>

<b> </b>

<b>Unit 3: At home</b>

<b>Unit 3: At home</b>

<b>Period 17: Language focus </b>

<b>review of knowledge</b>

<b>REVISION</b>

<b>written test - 45</b>

’

<b>: SPEAK AND LISTEN </b>

<b>:</b>

<b>READ</b>

<b>r</b>

<b>ead</b>

Language focus

<b>COUNTRY LIFE AND CITY LIFE</b>

<b>Speak-</b>

<b>listen</b>

<b>read</b>

<b>write</b>

<b>d.Homework.(2 )</b>

’

<b>language focus</b>

<b> rivsion</b>

<b> rivision </b>

<b>rivision </b>

<b>rivision</b>

<b>rivision</b>

<b>1.Aims</b>

<b>a.Knowledge:</b>

-Grammar :

+ Prepositions

<b>b.Skills:</b>

-Develope speaking, reading and writing skills

<b> c. Attitue</b>

<b> - </b>

have ps justify their skiabi lity themuselves.

<b> </b>

<b>2.preparation: </b>

a.Tt: Lesson plan, teacher’s book, student's book.

b.Ss: Learning the old lesson, preparing for the new, notebook

<b>3.Procedures :</b>

<b>a.Check old lesson(No)</b>

* Introduction :1’

Today we ‘ll remind all Knowledge have you learn

<b>b.New lesson:</b>

<b> </b>

<b>THE FIRST EXAMINATION</b>

<b>Afirst-aid course</b>

<b>getting started + listen and read</b>

<b>Speak -listen</b>

<b>write.</b>

<b>LANGUAGE FOCUS</b>

<b>REcycling</b>

<b>getting started + listen and read</b>

<b>sPeak </b>

<b> -</b>

<b>listen</b>

<b>: Read </b>

<b>write</b>

<b> </b>

<b>language focus</b>

<b>Lesson 1:</b>

<b>speak-listen</b>

<b>read</b>

<b>language focus</b>

Tài liệu liên quan

Tài liệu bạn tìm kiếm đã sẵn sàng tải về